QC Industries 125, 125Z and 250 Series Catalog

QC Industries LLC
Low profile conveyors
Product Catalog
Driven by customers ... powered by proven products

Contents
125 Series Standard Conveyors Page

Application Assistance Form 116-117
Specifications & Dimensions 8
Features & Benefits 9
Technical Data 10
How to Order 11
Belting 20-21
Side & Guide Rails 22-25
Mounts 26-27
Stands 28-29
Drives & Mounting Packages 30-37
Drive Accessories 38-40
Gang Driving 41
Automation Accessories 42-43
125 Series Cleated Conveyors Page

Technical Data 14
How to Order 15
Belting 20-21
Mounts 26-27
Stands 28-29
Gang Driving 41
125 Series Magnetic Conveyors Page

Technical Data 18
How to Order 19
Belting 20-21
Mounts 26-27
Stands 28-29
Gang Driving 41
Page
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Conveyors
Technical Data 46
How to Order 47
Belting 52-53
Mounts 58
Stands 59
Drive Accessories 66
Automation Accessories 67
2 QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Series Cleated Corrosion Resistant Conveyors Page

Technical Data 50
How to Order 51
Belting 52-53
Mounts 58
Stands 59
Drive Accessories 66
125 Z Series Angled Frame Conveyors Page

Z - Specifications & Dimensions 68
Z - Features & Benefits 69
L - Specifications & Dimensions 70
L - Features & Benefits 71
R - Specifications & Dimensions 72
R - Features & Benefits 73
U - Specifications & Dimensions 74
U - Features & Benefits 75
N - Specifications & Dimensions 76
N - Features & Benefits 77
Technical Data-How to Size & Order 78-81
Guides, Flared Side Rails & Hoppers 82-83
Stands 84-85
250 Series End & Center Drive Conveyors Page

End Drive Specifications & Dimensions 92
End Drive Features & Benefits 93
End Drive Technical Data 94
End Drive How to Order 95
Center Drive Specifications & Dimensions 96
Center Drive Features & Benefits 97
Center Drive Technical Data 98
Center Drive How to Order 99
Belting 100-101
Mounts 105
Stands 106-107
Additional Information
Page
Learn about QC Industries 4-7

Conveyor Selection Guide 123
Warranty & Returned Goods Information 122
QC Industries 513.753.6000 3
Standing the Test of Time Special Orders: Our Specialty
Since 1981 companies from If you're looking for something a little different than
around the world have been our standard conveyors, just contact us and we'll
relying on QC Industries for customize it for you. Whether it's a simple
their conveyor needs. Our bracket to integrate with a
55,000 square foot customized piece of equipment,
corporate headquarters, full assembly of a turnkey
located in Cincinnati, Ohio, offers visitors a 2000 project, or a completely
square foot display room filled with a full new conveyor design to
assortment of operating conveyors and make your application
interactive conveyor displays. Come visit us and parameters work; give us a
get hands-on with your call. We stand ready to
next conveyor project! discuss your needs in detail.
Driven
One-Stop Shopping Voice of the Customer
We offer standard low QC Industries is a Lean

profile conveyors that are Manufacturing Company. In
less than 2 inches in their 2003 our company decided to
overall height. Our standard go "Lean" and we intend to
units range from 2 inches continue with our lean efforts
wide up to 24 inches wide into the future. From "Policy
and up to 25 feet in length. Deployment" to "Six Sigma
We offer a variety of styles Quality" to "Kaizen Events", we personify
including Standard Automation Conveyors, continual improvement. All of our products are
Cleated Belt Conveyors, Magnetic Conveyors, designed based on the "Voice of the Customer",
Corrosion Resistant Conveyors and five and our "5S Committee" is constantly ensuring
configurations of Angled Frame Conveyors. We that we are creating a self-disciplined and self-
also have a large selection of standard sustaining culture to build a stronger organization.
accessories to customize every conveyor
including sides, guides, mounts, stands, motion
detection and more...
4
Lifetime Performance Application Spectrum
As standard, our conveyors Packaging

are constructed of high Workcell Assembly
impact-resistant heavy duty 10 OEM Machine Integration
gauge steel; a framework that Injection Molding
is laser cut and formed as one Pharmaceutical
solid piece. This single-body Food Processing
frame design is cutting edge technology that Labeling
ensures frame integrity and overall conveyor Bar Code Scanning
performance. Our conveyors are also designed High Heat & Hot Part Applications
to allow for bearing lubrication on the fly. This Metal Stamping
results in zero down time during regular Incline/Decline Operations
maintenance, saving our customers both time Overhead Pick Off & Transfer
and money. Belt tracking is designed into both Ferrous & Non-Ferrous Part Separation
ends of our conveyors for precision adjustments Clean Rooms
in the field. Our conveyors are built to last.
by
Customers
State-of-the-Art Manufacturing Worldwide Distribution Network
Great products are made With representative organizations

on great equipment; and located throughout the U.S., Canada,
our products are made Mexico, Europe & Australia, our
on the industry's finest extensive network of distributors and
equipment. From fully manufacturer’s representatives are
automated robotic lasers ready to help you with all your
used to manufacture our conveyor needs. We have multiple representation
fabricated components to in most localities to cover the
high tech computer-controlled CNC machinery variety of markets that we
used to produce our machine components, we serve, enabling us to offer
personify state-of-the-art manufacturing. We specialists within given
take pride in delivering quality in every product industries. Give us a call on
we produce. your next conveyor project and
let us help you size up a
winner.
5
Experienced Tech Support Superior Quality Assurance
We have experienced Quality assurance and

engineers ready right now to customer satisfaction are
assist you with the most difficult top priority at QC
of applications. We also pride Industries. All of our
ourselves on having highly conveyors are assembled
trained inside sales and tested prior to leaving
representatives assigned to the factory. We adhere to
every customer, so we can provide a strict three-signature
individualized service from the beginning of the sign off system. The first step requires technicians
quote to post-shipping and follow up. If you need to take ownership and personally sign off on orders
assistance in the field after the sale, we have they have filled; the next two tests and signatures
factory service technicians that can be are extra steps in ensuring that you receive exactly
dispatched for travel directly to your site. We what you have ordered. We strive to get it right for
strive to exceed your expectations. you the first time.
Powered
24-Hour Quote Turnaround World Class Delivery
In today's fast paced Once you have sized your

business world, when you application and placed your
need a quote, most often order, the last thing you
you need it fast. We pride need to worry about is
ourselves on turning quotes whether or not it will ship on
around to our customers time. At QC Industries we
within 24 hours of receiving provide world class on-time
the application parameters. delivery. We also institute
We recognize that time is continual improvement efforts focused at
money and to that end, we continuing to be the industry's best. Our flexible
want to earn your respect. Give us a call and put inventory system allows us to expedite orders
us to the test ... you'll be glad you did. when needed and ship conveyors same day if
necessary. Once your order has shipped, your
organization can receive a confirmation and
tracking information to follow your order right to
your dock door.
6
Computer-Aided Design Innovative Design
We offer CAD disks to help A benchmark of the QC

you lay out your Industries design is an eccentric
applications quickly and snap out sealed idler cartridge
precisely. We also offer that allows single point belt
CAD information online. If tensioning and, therefore, the
we are designing fastest belt change on the
something special for your market. This belt change is normally achieved without
application, we can provide a full 3D model for ever having to remove or adjust our drive packages.
“drop in” integration with your CAD package. We We challenge you to find that in our competition. Our
are continually striving to provide the necessary conveyors are also designed with a cutting edge
tools you need to succeed on your next conveyor crowned floating pulley system with thrust washers.
project. This technology protects your bearings against off-
center loading, and controls belt misalignment that
might otherwise result from camber.
by Proven Products
Check Out Our Web Site A World-Class Company
Go online to We have built our reputation by

www.qcindustries.com and combining innovative designs with
learn more about our high quality and exceptional service,
organization. You will find links earning the respect of end users and
to all the products that QC system integrators around the globe.
Industries has available, many Our extensive network of return
of which are not covered in this catalog. You will customers powers
also find where we are exhibiting at trade shows, us every day. Our customers
directions to our facility, and links to sign up for become customers for life.
our QC Communicator newsletter; which offers Let us show you why.
insightful information into our products and
applications. Information is available at your
fingertips right now, so go for it!
7
125 Series Standard Conveyors
Specifications
• Width 2” to 24”
• Length 24” to 144”
• Profile 1.89” high
• Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter
• Load Carrying Capacity to 450 lbs.*
• Speed Range up to 225 fpm
*See Technical Data on page 10
Overview Dimensions
6.13
.75
.42
W + .31 = W - .10 =
FRAME WIDTH BELT WIDTH W + 2.33
Note: As in all
industries, technical
.50 DIA. 1.00 SHAFT
specifications will 1/8 SQ. KEY LENGTH
change with 1.89 *
technology updates.
Please contact
factory or see
www.qcindustries.com .75
for the most up-to- .82 L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE .88
date drawings.
L - .31 = OVERALL LENGTH
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

Features & Benefits
Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained
areas
• Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame
construction, ensuring frame integrity
• Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt
change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive
packages or side rails
• High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in over
50 various types
• All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment
Tail Assembly Drive Assembly

• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail • Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of
assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia
the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity
• Crowned sealed drive assembly
• Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt designed to promote superior belt
tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are tracking, and is equipped with superior
filled with high performance grease needle bearings with seals that are
filled with high performance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the tail
assembly provide axial float, which allows • Thrust washers designed into the
the assembly to move with the natural drive assembly provide axial float,
camber of the belt and protect bearings which allows the assembly to move
against off-center load conditions with the natural camber of the belt and
protect bearings against off-center load conditions
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings
while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during • Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for
lubrication lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero
down time during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly,
providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing
conveyors assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal
conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the
idler end of the conveyor • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt
tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
• Drive pulley is available in solid output design, dual solid output
design, or hex through shaft design
125 Series Standard Conveyors
Technical Data
Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance

characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 10-A
system that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namely
equivalent load. 500
450 450
A conveyor application that is accumulating a 5-pound load, for example,
demands the conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we have 400
developed certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry. 350
300
300
Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your application 250
requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gearmotor 250 225
Lbs.
200
arrangement that will provide the correct torque. 200
175
150 150 150
125
100 100
1. Nominal Load 1. 100 75 75
87.5
50 50 50
25 37.5
Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12) 0
cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
Belt Width
Use Figure 10-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the
nominal load you need to carry (to ensure it can carry the load). Each conveyor Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Pushing (Drive Location C&D)
width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing and drive Note: See page 11
pulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One. Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications.
Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.
2. Accumulation 2.
If the application does not have an accumulating load, enter zero on Line Two.
Otherwise, multiply the nominal load from Line One times an accumulation Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 10-B
factor. (0.2 for accumulation belts listed on page 20 and 0.3 for MAA standard
urethane). Enter result on Line Two.
3.0 3.1
3.0
2.9
3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] = 3.
Equivalnt Load Constant
2.8
2.5 2.6
2.5
Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not 2.3
2.0 2.1
require an incline or decline, enter zero on Line Three. For inclining or
declining applications, choose a factor from Figure 10-B based upon the 1.8
1.5 1.6
angle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line
One. Enter result on Line Three. 1.4
1.0 1.1
0.8
4. Side Seals 4. 0.5 0.6
0.3
If the application does not call for side rails with seals to prevent small 0.0 0.0
parts from getting under the rail, enter zero on Line Four. Otherwise,
multiply the conveyor length in feet by 5. The side rails can be found on Angle 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
page 22. Example: 96" long conveyor with side seals would have a factor Factor 0.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1
of 40 (8 x 5). Enter result on Line Four.
**Verify Load Capacity:

After adding lines one through four together, please reference
Figure 10-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will
STOP carry the sum of Lines One through Four. If the sum is greater
than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen,
Conveyor Friction - Figure 10-C
please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory. 200
168
5. Conveyor Friction 5. 150

132
Equivalent Load
All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to the 96
nominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in, 100 84
add 4 to the conveyor width in inches, then multiply by 6, or simply choose 72
the value from Figure 10-C. Enter result on Line Five. 60
48
50 42
36
Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-5) lbs. 0

Conveyor Width 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (pages
116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gearmotor Frictional Load 36 42 48 60 72 84 96 132 168
for the conveyor. (See pages 30-37)
Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.
How to Order
125 Series Standard

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4
Drive Location
Construction
Drive Pulley
Frame Style
Drive Type
Tail Pulley
Length
Length
Length
Frame
Series
Width
Width
Belt
Belt
Belt
1 E S H - - -
Step 1
Series Drive Type Construction Frame Frame Style
B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige)

1 = 125 E = End Drive S = Standard H = Straight Frame
E = 1.81” Stainless Steel
Custom colors available - Contact factory
Step 2
Widths Lengths*
2” 3” 4” 6” 8” 10” 12” 18” 24” 24” 36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144”
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24 024 036 048 060 072 096 120 144
*Contact factory for special lengths
Step 3
Drive Location Drive Pulley Type Tail Pulley Type

D d d
C ar Cap 1/2” Dia* ar
an
d S an
d
Standard Q
St Solid Output Shaft St
n n
io 41 io 43
pt g. Thru 1/2” Hex pt g.
Oep H Oep Rolling Nosebar R
se Hex Input se
A n n
B io 41 io 42
pt g. 1/2” Dia* 1/2” Dia* pt g. Detectable D
A&B are drive pulling Oep D Oep
C&D are drive pushing se Dual Output se
* 1/8” sq. key included
Step 4
Choose three-digit belt ordering code on pages 20-21. As standard, we assemble the conveyor,
track the pre-tensioned belt and quality
check every conveyor before we ship to
Example: 1ESBH02-048-ASQ-MAA the customer. Accessories such as Drives,
125 Series conveyor with standard construction and 1.81” powder coated frame. Stands, Mounts, and Guides are
Conveyor measures 2” wide by 48” long with solid output pulley and standard tail pulley. packaged separately and are shipped
The drive output shaft is in the A position. The conveyor has a standard urethane belt. unassembled with the conveyor to prevent
damage during shipment. Complete
Optional: Snap-In Wiper is used with smooth surfaced, low friction belts for residue assembly can be provided upon request;
removal. This item snaps into the underside of the conveyor frame and can be installed please contact our factory for details.
at either end of the conveyor. Shown here on the drive end.
To Order:
Fill in the last two digits of the part number with the conveyor width Note: proceed to page 22 to
Part Number: 125-0192-WW continue sizing your conveyor...
Example: 125-0192-08
Snap-In Wiper for an 8” wide conveyor
125 Series Cleated Conveyors
Specifications
• Multiple Cleat Heights Available
Overview Dimensions
.75 6.13
.42
W + 2.33
Note: As in all
industries, technical W - 1.37 =
CLEAT WIDTH .50 DIA. 1.00 SHAFT
specifications will CLEAT HEIGHT
SEE PAGE 51 1/8 SQ. KEY LENGTH
change with 1.89 *
technology updates.
Please contact
factory or see
date drawings.

Features & Benefits
Conveyor
areas
• High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in
various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired spacing
and never glued to the top surface of the belt
Corrugated sides
available with
1 inch cleats
Multiple cleat sizes and styles available
See page 15 Step 4 for options

tracking and is equipped with superior tracking, and is equipped with superior
needle bearings with seals that are filled needle bearings with seals that are
with high performance grease filled with high performance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the tail • Thrust washers designed into the drive
assembly provide axial float, which allows assembly provide axial float, which
the assembly to move with the natural allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect
camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load bearings against off-center load conditions
conditions
• Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication
while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during
lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing
assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile
conveyors • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt
idler end of the conveyor • Drive pulley is available in solid output design, dual solid output design,
or hex through shaft design
125 Series Cleated Conveyors
Technical Data
Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 14-A
characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing 500
system that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namely 450
400
A conveyor application that is carrying a 5-pound load, for example, demands 350
the conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we have developed 300
certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry. 300
250
250 225
Lbs.
Follow the three steps below to determine the equivalent load your 200 200
application requires. The result will then be used to help choose the 175
150 150 150
gearmotor arrangement that will provide the correct torque. 125
100 100 100
75 87.5
75
50 50 50
25 37.5
0
1. Nominal Load 1. 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
Belt Width
Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Pushing (Drive Location C&D)
Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12)
Note: See page 15
cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Above
Use Figure 14-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the Aboveload
loadcarrying
carryingcapacities
capacitiesare
arefor
forboth
bothdrive
drivepushing
pushingand
andpulling
pullingapplications.
applications.
Note:
Note:for
fordrive
drivepushing
pushingapplications,
applications,decrease
decreaseload
loadcapacity
capacityofofconveyor
conveyorby by1/2.
1/2.
nominal load you need to carry (to ensure it can carry the load). Each
conveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing
and drive pulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.
Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 14-B

3.0 3.1
3.0
2.9
Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not
2.8
require an incline or decline, enter zero on Line Two. For inclining or 2.5 2.6
2.5
declining applications, choose a factor from Figure 14-B based upon the 2.3
angle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line 2.0
2.1
One. 1.8
1.5 1.6
Enter result on Line Two. 1.4
1.0 1.1
0.8
0.5 0.6
0.3
After adding lines One and Two together, please reference
0.0 0.0
Figure 14-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will
STOP carry the sum of Lines One through Two. If the sum is greater
than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, Angle 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory. Factor 0.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1
3. Conveyor Friction 3.
All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to the
nominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in, 200
the value from Figure 14-C.
132
150
Enter result on Line Three.
Equivalent Load
96
100 84
72
60
Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-3) lbs. 50 42
48
36
Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (pages
0
116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gearmotor
for the conveyor. (See pages 30-37) Conveyor Width 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
Frictional Load 36 42 48 60 72 84 96 132 168
How to Order
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5
Drive Location
Construction
Drive Pulley
Frame Style
# of Cleats
# of Cleats
# of Cleats
Drive Type
Tail Pulley
Length
Length
Length
Frame
Series
Width
Width
Belt
Belt
Belt
1 E S H - - -
Step 1
B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige) H = Straight Frame

1 = 125 E = End Drive S = Standard
Step 2
Widths Lengths*
2” 3” 4” 6” 8” 10” 12” 18” 24” 24” 36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144”
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24 024 036 048 060 072 096 120 144
Step 3

D d d
C ar Cap 1/2” Dia* ar
an
d S an
d
Standard Q
n n
io 41 io 42
pt g. Thru 1/2” Hex pt g. Detectable D
Oep H Oep
se Hex Input se
A n
B io 41
pt g. 1/2” Dia* 1/2” Dia*
A&B are drive pulling Oep D
C&D are drive pushing se Dual Output
Step 4
Choose a base belt material and cleat height
Base Belt Material 5mm 19mm 1/2” 3/4” 1” w/corr. sides 1” 2” 3”

MAA (Standard Urethane) CAB CAD CAE CAF CAH CAG CAI CAK
UAC (White Urethane) CBB CBD CBE CBF CBH CBG CBI CBK
Note 1: All belts must have a cleat indent of width minus 1.37”, except 1” cleats with corrugated sidewall. That cleat indent is width minus 3.62”
Note 2: Cleated belts are intended for use in conjunction with indented or adjustable guides (see page 23)
As standard, we assemble the conveyor,
Step 5 check every conveyor before we ship to
the customer. Accessories such as Drives,
Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packaged
Determine the total number of cleats on the conveyor. Multiply conveyor length (in inches) by 2,
separately and are shipped unassembled
divide by the desired spacing between the cleats (in inches). This will result in the total number of
with the conveyor to prevent damage
cleats evenly spaced around the circumference of the belt. Note: Must have a whole number of cleats.
during shipment. Complete assembly can
be provided upon request; please contact
Example: 1ESBH06-048-ASQ-CAE016 our factory for details.
125 Series conveyor with standard construction and 1.81” powder coated frame. Conveyor
measures 6” wide by 48” long with solid output pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output Note: proceed to page 22 to
shaft is in the A position. The conveyor belt has a 1/2” high cleat every 6”. continue sizing your conveyor...
125 Series Magnetic Conveyors
Specifications
Overview Dimensions
2.69 NO MAGNETS NO MAGNETS 4.00
.42
W + 2.33
Note: As in all
specifications will MAGNET SPACING
change with .50 DIA. 1.00 SHAFT
SEE PAGE 19
1/8 SQ. KEY LENGTH
technology updates. 1.89 *
Please contact
factory or see
www.qcindustries.com
for the most up-to- .82 L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE .88 .75
date drawings.
Features & Benefits
Conveyor
areas
• Single piece 10-gauge stainless steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body
frame construction, ensuring frame integrity
• Ceramic magnets are custom positioned within the conveyor framework to achieve an optimum
magnetic field and smooth product movement for your application
• High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in over 50
various types
• All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing
equipment

tracking and is equipped with superior tracking, and is equipped with superior
needle bearings with seals that are filled needle bearings with seals that are
with high performance grease filled with high performance grease
• Thrust washers designed into the tail • Thrust washers designed into the drive
assembly provide axial float, which allows assembly provide axial float, which
the assembly to move with the natural allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect
camber of the belt and protect bearings bearings against off-center load conditions
against off-center load conditions
• Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication
while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during
assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile
idler end of the conveyor • Drive pulley is available in solid output design, dual solid output design,
or hex through shaft design
125 Series Magnetic Conveyors
Technical Data Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 14-A

500
Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance 450 450
300 250
Lbs. 225
200
the conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we have developed 200 175
150 150
certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry. 150 125
100 100 87.5
100 75 75
Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your application 50 50
25 37.5
requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gearmotor 50
arrangement that will provide the correct torque. 0 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
Belt Width
1. Nominal Load 1. Note: See page 19
Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications.
metal parts weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120
lbs. Use Figure 18-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the Magnetic Load Factors - Figure 18-B
nominal load you need to carry (to ensure it can carry the load). Each conveyor
0.80 0.74
width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing and drive
pulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.
Equivalent Load Constant

0.60
2. Magnetic Factor 2.
0.46
To achieve magnetic pull, there are rows of magnets down the length of the conveyor. 0.39
The maximum number of rows can be determined by dividing the conveyor width by 0.40
0.30
two (not to exceed eight rows). Choose the number of magnet rows and then multiply
the load by the factor from Figure 18-B. Enter result on Line Two. 0.23
0.20 0.16
3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] = 3. 0.08
0.01
Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not 0.00
require an incline or decline, enter zero on Line Three. For inclining or 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
declining applications, choose a factor from Figure 18-C based upon the Number of Magnet Rows
angle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line
One. Enter result on Line Three. Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 18-C
4. Side Seals 4. 3.0

3.0
3.1
2.9
2.5 2.8
2.6
If the application does not call for side rails with seals to prevent small 2.5
parts from getting under the rail, enter zero on Line Four. Otherwise, 2.0 2.3
multiply the conveyor length in feet by 5. The side rails can be found on 2.1
page 22. Example: 96" long conveyor with side seals would have a factor 1.8
1.5 1.6
1.4
1.0 1.1
After adding lines one through four together, please reference 0.8
0.5 0.6
STOP Figure 18-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will
carry the sum of Lines One through Four. If the sum is greater
than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, 0.0
0.0
0.3
please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory.

Angle 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
Factor 0.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1
All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to the Conveyor Friction - Figure 18-D
the value from Figure 18-D. Enter result on Line Five.
132
150
Equivalent Load

100 84
72
Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (pages 60
116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gearmotor 48
50 42
for the conveyor. (See pages 30-37) 36
Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number. 0
Conveyor Width 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
Frictional Load 36 42 48 60 72 84 96 132 168
How to Order
Drive Location
Construction
6” Sections on Row
6” Section from Tail
Drive Pulley
Frame Style
Number of rows
Drive Type
Tail Pulley
Row Spacing
Length
Length
Length
Frame
Series
Width
Width
Belt
Belt
Belt
See Step 5
1 E M E H - - - - below
Consult factory
Step 1
1 = 125 E = End Drive M = Magnetic E = 1.81” Stainless Steel H = Straight Frame
Step 2
Widths Lengths*
2” 3” 4” 6” 8” 10” 12” 18” 24” 24” 36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144”
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24 024 036 048 060 072 096 120 144
Step 3

C D rd rd
da Cap 1/2” Dia*
S da
an an Standard Q
n n
io 41 io 42
pt g. Thru 1/2” Hex pt g. Detectable D
Oep H Oep
se Hex Input se
A n
B io 41
pt g. 1/2” Dia* 1/2” Dia*
A&B are drive pulling Oep D
C&D are drive pushing se Dual Output
Step 4
Choose three-digit belt ordering code on page 20 and 21.
Step 5 As standard, we assemble the

conveyor, track the pre-tensioned belt
and quality check every conveyor
Please send the part to be conveyed to our Sales Department to evaluate for proper magnetic
before we ship to the customer.
arrangement. Ceramic magnets are positioned in a stainless steel frame according to each application.
Accessories such as Drives, Stands,
This permits a wide variety of magnetic field strengths and location options. Our application specialists
Mounts, and Guides are packaged
will complete the part number for you. Below is an illustration of how we document the magnet spacing.
separately and are shipped
unassembled with the conveyor to
3 Number of magnet sections from tail 2 Distance from tail before magnetic field begins prevent damage during shipment.
Complete assembly can be provided
upon request; please contact our
1 Number factory for details.
of rows 4 Row Spacing
Note: proceed to page 22 to

continue sizing your conveyor...
125 Series Conveyors
ng
n
ptio
(°F)
ture Operati
l
teria
on ( ficient
)
scri
ches
ture
e
pera rt
)
Cod
(°F)
CoF
e Ma
a
e De
Max t Term P
t
s (in
Tem Ambien
of F de Coef
Thic ge Bel
ring
tic
ac
ac
r
Colo
knes
Tem
pera
Orde
Surf
-Sta
Surf
ricti
Belt Selection Guide
ra
r
si
.
Sho
Max
Ave
FDA
Anti
Belt
Top
Top
Belt
Top
Multi-Purpose Belts
A. Standard Urethane MAA Smooth Urethane White YES LOW 212 176 YES 0.075
B. Option #1-Sealed Edge Standard Urethane MAB Smooth, Sealed Edge Urethane White YES LOW 212 176 YES 0.075
C. Option #2-Spill Edge Cleat MAC Longitudinal Serrated Cleat Urethane White YES LOW 212 176 YES 0.075
D. Option #3-Perforated Belt MAD Smooth, Perforations Urethane White YES LOW 212 176 YES 0.075
High Friction Belts
A. Grey Diamond Top High Adhesion FAA Snakeskin PVC Light Grey NO HIGH 212 176 NO 0.103
B. Green High Tack PVC FAB Matte PVC Soft Dark Green NO HIGH 212 176 YES 0.145
C. Beige FDA High Adhesion FAC Smooth Silicone Beige YES HIGH 212 176 YES 0.072
D. Black Lateral Grooved High Adhesion FAD Longitudinal Groove PVC Black NO HIGH 194 158 YES 0.083
E. Black Rough Top High Adhesion FAF Rough Top PVC Black NO HIGH 212 176 YES 0.185
Accumulation Belts (Low Friction)
A. White FDA Fabric Accumulator AAA Fabric Urethane White YES VERY LOW 212 176 YES 0.054
C. Black Tight Weave Accumulator AAC Fabric Urethane Impregnated Black NO VERY LOW 248 212 NO 0.051
D. Grey Textured Urethane Accumulator AAD Textured Urethane Impregnated Light Grey NO VERY LOW 140 140 YES 0.060
E. Green FDA Fabric Accumulator AAE Fabric Urethane Impregnated Dark Green YES VERY LOW 175 175 YES 0.054
Heat-Resistant Belts
A. White Silicone Heat Resistor HAA Fine Texture Silicone White NO MED 356 356 YES 0.059
B. White Silicone Translucent Resistor HAB Fabric Silicone Impregnated White NO LOW 356 356 YES 0.051
C. Smooth White FDA Silicone Heat Resistor HAC Smooth Silicone White YES MED 400 350 NO 0.085
D. Blue Nitrile Heat Resistor HAD Coarse Structure Nitrile Rubber Blue NO MED 300 212 YES 0.079
E. White Nitrile Heat Resistor HAE Smooth Nitrile Rubber White NO MED 300 212 YES 0.067
Cut Resistant Belts
A. Yellow Cut Resistor IAA Smooth Urethane Yellow NO LOW 230 194 YES 0.060
B. Standard Urethane IAB Smooth Urethane White YES LOW 212 176 YES 0.075
C. Black Dimple Top Cut Resistor IAC Dimple Top Hard Urethane Black NO HIGH 248 212 YES 0.083
D. Rugged Poly Cut Resistor IAD Structured Nitrile Rubber Black NO MED 176 176 YES 0.100
FDA Belts
A. Standard Urethane UAA Smooth Urethane White YES LOW 212 176 YES 0.075
B. Sealed Edge Standard Urethane UAB Smooth, Sealed Edge Urethane White YES LOW 212 176 YES 0.075
C. Pure White FDA UAC Matte Urethane White YES LOW 230 194 YES 0.061
D. Woven White FDA UAD Smooth Urethane Impregnated Translucent YES MED 248 212 YES 0.047
E. White FDA Urethane High Adhesion UAE Smooth Urethane White YES HIGH 176 176 YES 0.050
Static Conductive Belts
A. Textured Carbon Impregnated EAA Textured Urethane Impregnated Black NO MED 212 176 104e 0.063
B. Accumulation Static Conductive EAB Rough Texture Nitrile Rubber Black NO HIGH 212 212 104e 0.080
C. Low Friction Static Conductive EAC Smooth Urethane Black NO LOW 158 158 105e 0.040
D. Structured Static Conductive EAD Structured NBR Impregnated Fleece Black NO MED 176 176 105e 0.100
Translucent Belts
A. Green Translucent Accumulator TAA Textured Impregnated PU Light Green YES VERY LOW 175 175 NO 0.023
B. FDA Fabric Translucent Accumulator TAB Fabric Urethane Impregnated Translucent YES VERY LOW 248 212 NO 0.024
C. Silicone Translucent Accumulator TAC Textured Silicone Translucent YES VERY LOW 176 176 NO 0.040
Color Contrasting Belts

A. Gray Textured Contraster PAA Textured PVC Grey NO MED 158 158 YES 0.060
B. Smooth Green Urethane Contraster PAB Smooth Urethane Green YES LOW 176 176 YES 0.050
C. Dark Green PVC Contraster PAC Matte PVC Dark Green NO MED 212 176 YES 0.075
D. Light Blue Urethane Contraster PAD Matte Urethane Light Blue YES MED 212 176 YES 0.063
E. Smooth Black PVC Contraster PAE Smooth PVC Black NO MED 212 176 NO 0.071
Non-Marking Belts
A. Felt Topped Product Protector NAA Felt Felt White YES MED 175 175 NO 0.070
B. Fabric Topped Product Protector NAB Fabric Spun Polyester White YES MED 175 175 NO 0.067
C. Cotton Topped Product Protector NAC Fabric Cotton Natural White YES MED 175 175 NO 0.072
D. Black Elastomer Product Protector NAD Felt Polyester Black NO MED 302 248 YES 0.098
Release Properties Belts
A. Beige Silicone Product Release RAA Smooth Silicone Beige YES HIGH 212 176 YES 0.072
B. White PVC Product Release RAB Matte, Smooth Non-Stick PVC White YES LOW 194 158 YES 0.059
C. Textured Silicone Product Release RAC Fine Texture Silicone White NO MED 356 356 YES 0.059
D. Smooth Habilene Product Release RAD Smooth Habilene White YES MED 176 176 YES 0.090
E. Smooth Silicone Product Release RAE Textured Silicone White YES LOW 176 176 NO 0.040
Specialty/Profile Belts
A. Green Sawtooth Profile Belt SAA Sawtooth PVC Green NO HIGH 212 176 YES 0.177
B. White Grooved Rubber SAB Lateral Groove Nitrile Rubber White YES HIGH 225 225 NO 0.210
C. Stipple Top PVC Profile SAC Stipple Top PVC White YES MED 212 176 NO 0.106
D. Negative Pyramid Profile SAD Textured Urethane White YES MED 212 176 YES 0.078
E. Green Longitudinal PVC Profile Belt SAE Longitudinal Groove PVC Green NO HIGH 175 175 YES 0.175
Chemical Resistant Belts
Due to the broad spectrum of chemicals and percentages of chemical mixtures, QC Industries offers belt selection assistance in chemical application circumstances. Our
application specialists will help determine which belt is best suited to withstand the chemicals present as well as the entire scope of the application parameters. This approach
delivers the best possible product for the application.
20 QC Industries 513.753.6000 Specifications subject to change - consult factory

QC Industries offers conveyor belting for a contact one of our sales engineers directly at To Order Belt Only:
wide variety of applications and industries. the factory to discuss your application Choose nominal conveyor width and length in
These pages cover a number of the more parameters. inches and enter the three-digit belt code.
popular belts we have provided through the
years. These belts have all been tested at QC To Order With Conveyor: 1E - WW - LLL -
Industries and offer a compatible fit to the 125 Please use the three-digit QC belt code
Series conveyors. If you have a specific need number for conveyor ordering on pages 11, Example: 1E-08-120-MAA
that is not covered on these pages, please 15, and 19. Standard urethane belt for an 8” wide by 120”
long 125 Series conveyor
Multi-Purpose Belts
AA AB AC AD
M M M M
QUICK SHIP!
High-Friction Belts
A B C D F
FA FA FA FA FA
A C D E
AA AA AA AA
A B C D E
HA HA HA HA HA
Cut-Resistant Belts
A B C D
IA IA IA IA
FDA/USDA Belts
A B C D E
UA UA UA UA UA

A B C D
EA EA EA EA
Translucent Belts
A B C
TA TA TA
A B C D E
PA PA PA PA PA
Non-Marking Belts
A B C D
NA NA NA NA
A B C D E
RA RA RA RA RA
A B C D E
SA SA SA SA SA

Due to the wide variety of chemical and percentages of chemical mixtures, QC Industries offers belt selection assistance in these application circumstances. Our application
specialists will help determine which belt is best suited to withstand not only the chemicals present, but the entire scope of the application parameters. This approach
125 Series Side Rails & Guide Rails
Fixed Side Rails
W + 1.06 W + 1.06
W + 1.06
W - .61 W - .19
W + .06
.46 *
.33 * .33 *
2.22 2.22 2.35
Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides
1/3” Side Rails Part No. 125-0153- with seals** with wear strip
Part No. 125-0169- Part No. 125-0170-
125-0169 pictured
To Order: To Order: To Order:
Fill in the last three digits of the part Fill in the last three digits of the part Fill in the last three digits of the part
number with the nominal conveyor number with the nominal conveyor number with the nominal conveyor
length in inches. length in inches. length in inches.
Ex. 125-0153-048 Ex. 125-0169-096 Ex. 125-0170-024
W + 1.19
W + 1.19 W + 1.19
W + .06
W - .19
W + .06
W - .61
1.03 * .88
.93 * .78 .78
.93 *
2.91
2.81 2.81 2.03
2.03 2.03
1” Side Rails Aluminum extruded 1” high sides Aluminum extruded 1” high sides Aluminum extruded 1” high sides
Part No. 125-0174- with seals** with wear strip
125-0178 pictured Part No. 125-0177- Part No. 125-0178-
Ex. 125-0174-048 Ex. 125-0177-024 Ex. 125-0178-096
W + 1.19 W + 1.19 W + 1.19

W + .06
W + .06 W - .18
W - .61
1.93 * 1.78 1.93 * 1.78 2.05 * 1.90
3.81 3.93
3.81
2.03 2.03 2.03
Part No. 125-0215- with seals** with wear strip
Ex. 125-0215-024 Ex. 125-0217-036 Ex. 125-0216-060
Note 1: W = nominal belt width in inches * Dimension reflects use of standard urethane belt (MAA) see page 20
Note 2: All rails are sold in sets ** Side seals are not intended for cleated belts, high friction belts, or belt speeds exceeding 30 FPM
Note 3: Side rails start 1 11/16” from tail end and stop 3 1/2” from drive end
Custom fixed and flared side rails are available. For heights, consult factory
Adjustable Guide Rails
W - .10 W - .25
3.00 MAX. 3.00 MAX.
ADJ. ADJ.
2.50 MAX. *
1.13 MIN. * 3.25 MAX. *
1.99 MIN. *
4.34
W + 2.81
W + 2.81
W + 9.12 MAX. W + 9.12 MAX
2-Axis Adjustable Guides 1” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides 2” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides
125-0281-048-T pictured Part No. 125-0281- - Part No. 125-0282- -
W -.38
MAX. To Order:
3.00
Fill in the last three digits of part number with the nominal
ADJ.
length of the conveyor. Choose a set screw adjustment or a
thumb wheel adjustment mechanism by indicating (S) for set
5.25 MAX. * screw and (T) for thumb wheel at the end of the part number.
3.00 MIN. *
Example 125-0281-120 -T
4.34 1” adjustable guide rail with wear strip and thumb wheel
adjustment for a 120” long conveyor.
The 2-Axis Adjustable Guides are designed to guide the

product being conveyed. The rails can adjust vertically and
horizontally, offering the end user the ultimate in flexibility.
W + 2.81 Choose from a set screw or thumb wheel adjustment. The
thumb wheel is shown in the above picture and is ideal for
W + 9.12 MAX. quick adjustments, because no tools are required.
3” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides
Part No. 125-0283- -
W + 1.57
W + 1.42
W - 1.21
W - 1.21
2.40 MAX. *
2.13 MIN. *
3.28 3.94
1.62 MAX. *
1.03 MIN. *
1” High Indented Guide Assembly 2” High Indented Guide Assembly

Indented Guides Part No. 125-0219- Part No. 125-0218-
125-0219 pictured
W + 1.57
W - 1.31
To Order:
conveyor length in inches.
3.03 * Example 125-0219-120

1” adjustable guide rail with wear strip for a 120” long
4.92 conveyor.
The Indented Guides are designed to work with cleated belts.

Each cleated belt is indented slightly (see page 15). The
Indented Guide spans the indentation, providing a pocket
which surrounds the product being conveyed.
3” High Indented Guide Assembly

Part No. 125-0222-
125 Series Side Rails & Guide Rails
Tee Slotted Extrusions
10-32 UNF THRU

.25 To Order:
Use part number
125-0074-035 (Qty. 1)
125-0074-035-SET (Qty. 4)
.19
The Rotate-In Tee Nut is designed to hold
lightweight brackets that have a thickness of
.148” or under
.86
The Rotate-In Tee Nut can be used with the
following rails and bolt on profiles:
Rotate-In Tee Nut 1” - 125-0174, 125-0177, 125-0178
Part No. 125-0074-035 (Qty 1) 2” - 125-0215, 125-0217, 125-0216
Rotate-In Tee Nut Part No. 125-0074-035-SET (Qty 4) Tee - 125-0225, 125-0199
Note:
The Rotate-In Tee Nut works with the 1” and 2” side rails shown on page 22,
as well as the Single Tee Slot and the Multi Tee Slot extrusions shown below.
W + 2.68
W + 1.28
W + 1.50
.73 * .73 *
1.16 1.16
Multi Tee Slot Side Assembly Single Tee Slot Side Assembly
Multi Tee Slot Part No. 125-0225- Single Tee Slot Part No. 125-0199-
To Order: To Order:
Fill in last three digits of part number Fill in last three digits of part number
with the nominal conveyor length in with the nominal conveyor length in
inches. Part number includes one set inches. Part number includes one set
as shown in drawing. as shown in drawing.
Product Containment Accessories
W + 3.25 MAX.
W + 1.50 MIN.
LANES W - .61
.33 *
RAIL CLEARANCE 3.86 MAX.

2" OR 3" 3.29 MIN.
RAILS
W + 1.56
Lane Dividers Lane Dividers Hinged Side Extenders Hinged Side Extenders
For part number see below For part number see below
Shown with 1/3” side rail with seal
To Order:
LD S To Order:
Construction (S - Standard)
Hinged Side Extenders bolt directly onto
Mounting Type (F - Frame or T - Tee slot)
the frame of the conveyor, and can be
# of Lanes (2,3,4 etc)
used in conjunction with 1/3” side rails.
# of Rails (1, 2, 3 etc) Example Only available in 24” and 36” lengths. Note:
Conveyor Length (in inches) LD-2-08144-12FS To obtain a longer length of hinged side, please
Conveyor Width (in inches) 2” Lane Divider for 8” wide 144” long 36” Long Part No. 125-1003-036 use combinations of 24” and 36” lengths.
conveyor. One rail with two lanes 24” Long Part No. 125-1003-024 However, all length combinations must equal
Rail Clearance Height (2” or 3”) 12” less than the nominal conveyor length.
mounted to the conveyor frame
24 QC Industries 513.753.6000 *Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.
Flared Side Rails
Flared Side Rails are ideal for

W + 10.35 MAX. applications that require a “drop zone”
W + 4.41 MIN. wider than the width of the conveyor.
The rails attach to and require the use
of the adjustable guide rails shown at
45° W + 4.97 MAX. the top of page 23. Additionally, the user
W - .97 MIN. can add other components (shown
below) to help guide the product as
needed. Note: Flared Side Rails should
4.00 be ordered one size smaller than the
nominal length of the conveyor.
To Order:
Z-1004-012 12” length

Flared Side Rails Z-1004-018 18” length
Z-1004-024 24” length
Z-1004-030 30” length
L .25 Z-1004-036 36” length
Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide Z-1004-042 42” length
(sold separately) Part # 125-0282-LLL-S
Z-1004-048 48” length
Example:
5.74 MAX. * (1) Z-1004-036
4.93 MIN. * A set of 36” long flared side rails
The rails are sold in sets and include

mounting hardware
Note: Requires Part #125-0282-LLL-S shown

L = length of flared side rails on page 23
End Stops are used in conjunction with the

Flared Side Rail. Stops are adjustable down
the length of the rail. Note: End stops are
available for the following width conveyors:
8”, 10”, 12”, 18”, and 24”.
2.90
To Order:
.90
8” 125-0234-08
10” 125-0234-10
12” 125-0234-12
18” 125-0234-18
24” 125-0234-24
2.35 *
Example: (1) 125-0234-10
One end stop for a 10” wide conveyor
End Stops equipped with flared side rails
Note: Designed to be compatible with 1”

Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide and 2” cleats. End stops are equipped
AND Flared Side Rails (both sold with a swing gate to help contain product
separately) Part # 125-0282-LLL-S,
#Z-1004-LLL
The Adjustable Hopper is used in

conjunction with the Flared Side Rail. The
hopper is made from (2) end stops, which
are adjustable down the length of the rail.
L Available for the following width
conveyors: 8”, 10” 12” 18”, and 24”.
L - 4.20 MAX. To Order:
Please order a quantity of 2:
L - 5.80 MAX.
8” 125-0234-08
10” 125-0234-10
12” 125-0234-12
18” 125-0234-18
2.35 * 24” 125-0234-24
Example: (2) 125-0234-10
Two end stops for a 10” wide conveyor
Adjustable Hopper equipped with flared side rails
Note: Designed to be compatible with 1”
L = length of flared side rails and 2” cleats. End stops are equipped
Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide with a swing gate to help contain product
AND Flared Side Rails (both sold
separately) Part # 125-0282-LLL and
#Z-1004-LLL
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21. QC Industries 513.753.6000 25
125 Series Mounts
Standard Mounts
.22 DIA. .34 DIA. W + 1.46 To Order:

Frame Mounted version attaches
directly to the conveyor frame. The
.41 .59 frame has mounting holes every 3”.
1.15 .88
3.06 The Tee Slot mounted version
2.06 *
1.32 1.32 attaches to 1” side rails, 2” side rails,
.31 the single tee slot and the multi tee
slot. See page 22 & 24.
.13 1.25
.38 .135
SLOT W + 1.09 MAX. Part No. 125-0181-01 (Tee Slot)*
3.50 W + .57 MIN. Part No. 125-0181-04 (Frame)*
Universal Adjustable Side Mount W + 1.71 Part No. 125-0181-05 (For use with
125-0181-04 pictured multi-tier stand)*
Notes:
*Part No. denotes one bracket and
Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor. necessary hardware
Frame mounted brackets can only be used with 1” high or lower cleats.
Tee Slot mounted brackets can only be used with 1/2” high or lower cleats.
W + 1.46
.22 DIA. .34 DIA.
To Order:
.59 Frame Mounted version attaches
1.53 directly to the conveyor frame. The
.88 frame has mounting holes every 3”.
.13 .31 4.81 5.28 *
The Tee Slot mounted version
3.10 3.07 attaches to 1” side rails, 2” side rails,
1.25 the single tee slot and the multi tee
.38 .135 W + 1.09 MAX. Part No. 125-0182-01 (Tee Slot)*

Universal Raised Side Mount SLOT W + .57 MIN. Part No. 125-0182-04 (Frame)*
3.50 W + 1.71
125-0182-04 pictured
Notes: *Part No. denotes one bracket and

necessary hardware
Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor.
Universal raised side mounts work with all cleat heights.
5/16 DIA.
.22 1.00 THRU HOLE
To Order:
.66
2.04 *
1.60 Attaches directly to the conveyor
frame. The frame has mounting holes
every 3”.
.135 1.56
3.00 W + 1.37 Part No. 125-0010-00*
Tee Mount 4.00 W + 2.00
Notes:
necessary hardware
Can also be used at tail end of conveyor in conjunction with drive end mounts
(125-0014-00, 125-0013-00, and 125-0015-00).
Cannot be used with cleated belts.
11/32 DIA.
5/16-18 To Order:
.63 SET SCREW Attaches directly to the underside of
the conveyor frame. To order, use the
.257 DIA. part number below and fill in the
THRU HOLE 2.89 * nominal conveyor width in inches for
1.25 .16 .43 the last two digits.
.84
Part No. 125-0011-WW *
W - 1.50
W - .75
W + 1.00 Example: 125-0011-04*
Universal Bottom Mount Universal Bottom mount for a 4” wide
W + 1.50 conveyor

Notes:
necessary hardware
Bottom mount can attach conveyor to a horizontal or vertical surface.
Cannot be used with high adhesion or cleated belts.

Standard Mounts
To Order:
.93 * This mount uses existing through
Standard method for .63 holes on the conveyor that are
mounting to stands located 6.06” from the tail end and
(fasteners included) 8.5” or 14.5” from the drive end,
3/8-16 depending on which gearmotor
.38 W + 1.00 CAP SCREW selection is chosen. This will mount
the conveyor to a flat surface. To
W + 1.75 5/16-18 order, use the part number below
Alternate method for CAP SCREW and fill in the nominal conveyor width
mounting .93 * in inches for the last two digits.
(fasteners not included) .63
Rod Clamp Mount Part No. 125-0116-WW*
Example: 125-0116-06*
Notes: Rod Clamp Mount for 6”
Mounts cannot be used with Multi Tee or Single Tee Slotted Side Assembly. wider conveyor
Mounts cannot be used with cleated belts.
necessary hardware
To Order:
These mounts are primarily intended to
3.38 W + 1.75 provide precise alignment when mounted to
1.00 a common flat surface, or for multiple
.63
conveyors utilizing a common drive shaft.
See gang drive page 41.
2.00 TYPE PART NO.

1.34
LEFT HAND 125-0014-00
RIGHT HAND 125-0013-00
9/32 DIA. THRU UNIVERSAL* 125-0015-00
1.41
Drive End Mount W + 1.13
*This mount replaces either right hand or
2.06 left hand mount and allows mounting of a
side drive.
Notes:
Mounts can only be used with a side or remote drive.
To Order:
3.38 W + 1.75 For applications where rapid alignment
and rigid mounting of conveyors is
.94 .63 required. These clamp mounts provide
an economical and practical approach to
rapid bolster mounting of gang driven
1.34 2.75 conveyors. See gang drives pg. 41.
2.70 MAX. TYPE PART NO.
LEFT HAND 125-0103-BL
RIGHT HAND 125-0102-BR
BRACKET BY CUSTOMER
Self-Aligning Bottom Clamp Mount UNIVERSAL* 125-0117-BU
3/8 MAX. THICKNESS
*This mount replaces either right hand or left
hand mount and allows mounting of a side drive.
Notes:
To Order:
BRACKET BY CUSTOMER For applications where rapid alignment
3/8 MAX. THICKNESS and rigid mounting of conveyors is
required. These clamp mounts are
ideal for quick die change systems
since the conveyors can be installed
2.70 MAX. into the dies prior to being inserted into
1.34 2.75 the press. See gang drives pg. 41.
TYPE PART NO.

LEFT HAND 125-0102-TL
.94 .63
W + 1.75 RIGHT HAND 125-0103-TR
Self-Aligning Top Clamp Mount 3.38
UNIVERSAL* 125-0117-TU
*This mount replaces either right hand or left
Notes: hand mount and allows mounting of a side drive.

125 Series Stands
NOTE: There is a 3” overall height adjustment with feet

Aluminum Exact Width Conveyor Stands
To order:
Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches) H1 H2
H1 - H2
WW
WW H1 - H2
06 - 09 Part No. 0182 - - -
33 - 36
09 - 12 36 - 39
12 - 15 39 - 42 1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections.
15 - 18 42 - 45 Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height.
18 - 21 45 - 48
H1 - H2 2) Enter conveyor width into WW section.
21 - 24 48 - 51
24 - 27 51 - 54 NOTE: No additional mounts are required.
27 - 30 54 - 57
30 - 33 57 - 60 NOTE: Conveyors 4” wide and under will have the stand
framework on the outside of the conveyor; and the minimum
Stand Widths-WW (nominal conveyor width in inches) height range is 12 - 15 inches
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24
Example: 0182 - 30 - 33 - 24 (Part No. includes one stand)
Steel Telescoping Conveyor Stands

To order: H1 H2 WW
WW
Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches) Part No. 0184 - - -
H1 - H2 1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections.
16 - 24 Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height.
23 - 36 2) Enter top plate width into WW section.
35 - 48
H1 - H2 NOTE: Mounts are required to attach the conveyor to the stand.
47 - 60 See mount pages 26 & 27 for details
NOTE: 8” wide top plate will accept up to a 6” wide conveyor

Top Plate Widths - WW (in inches) 14” wide top plate will accept up to a 12” wide conveyor
21” wide top plate will accept up to an 18” wide conveyor
08 14 21 27 27” wide top plate will accept up to a 24” wide conveyor
Steel Stands with Stabilizers

To order: H1 H2
WW WW
Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches) Part No. 0186 - - -
H1 - H2 1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections.
18 - 26 Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height.
H1- H2 25 - 38
2) Enter top plate width into WW section.
37 - 50
49 - 62 NOTE: Must use Rod Clamp Mount 125-0016-WW (See page
27) to attach the conveyor to the stand.
NOTE: 8” wide top plate will accept up to a 6” wide conveyor
Top Plate Widths - WW (in inches) 14” wide top plate will accept up to a 12” wide conveyor
21” wide top plate will accept up to an 18” wide conveyor
48” 08 14 21 27 27” wide top plate will accept up to a 24” wide conveyor

Note: Max conveyor length is 60”
Aluminum Multiple Conveyor Stands

WW To order:
H1 H2 WW
H1 - H2 Part No. 0187 - - -
(in inches)
1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections.
27 - 30 2) Choose stand width (WW) and enter into WW section.
33 - 36
39 - 42 NOTE: Conveyor will add 1.89” to top of belt height
45 - 48 NOTE: Adjustable side mounts are required to attach the
H1- H2 51 - 54 conveyors to the stand. Use Part No. 125-0181-05
57 - 60
NOTE: *Stand width must be at least 4” greater than the width of
the top tier conveyor and/or at least 8” greater than the width of
the bottom tier conveyor
Widths - WW* (in inches)
Stand Widths - WW (in inches) NOTE: Bottom conveyors can be adjusted within 5” from the floor
12 18 24 30 36 to within 8” of the top conveyor
NOTE: All applications will require the end user to properly lag stands and ensure stability. Because every application and installation is different, the
functionality and performance of the supports depend on the end user. QC Industries can aid in determining the supports your application requires.
Angle Brace
To order:
Part No.
125-0189-00
For use with aluminum stands only.
Angle brace can be used on a 125 Series conveyor with a minimum top of belt height
of 28”. The angle brace is designed for conveyors 5’ or longer. When used with
casters, angle braces must be used on both stands. Part number denotes a set;
order (1) per stand.
Aluminum Cross Ties
To order:
Cross Ties - Available Lengths Part No. LLL
Inches LLL 125 - 0235 -
24” 024
Enter length of cross ties needed into the “LLL” section
36” 036
above. A quantity of one includes (2) cross ties.
48” 048
60” 060 Note: Cross ties require customer to cut to length
72” 072 because of stand placement variations.
96” 096
120” 120 Example: 125-0235-120
144” 144
Steel Cross Ties
To order:
Cross Ties - Available Lengths Part No. LLL
Inches LLL 125 - 0236 -
24” 024
36” 036 Enter length of cross ties needed into the “LLL” section
48” 048 above. A quantity of one includes (2) cross ties.
60” 060
120” 120
144” 144 Example: 125-0236-036
Casters Swivel-In Tee Nut

To order: To order:
Part No. 125-0122-04 Part No.
Swivel locking caster 125-0074-036 (Qty 1)
Order (2) per stand 125-0074-036-SET (Qty 4)
Casters can be added to The Swivel-In Tee Nut is ideal
either aluminum or steel for mounting brackets to an
stands. Swivel locking casters aluminum stand, and allows
increase stand height by quick mounting location
5.50”. changes.
Casters should only be used
with stands that are 1/3 as 1/4 - 20 thread in Tee-Nut is
wide as they are tall. provided for attaching accessories
125 Series Drives
Drive Sizing Technical Data

The equivalent load was determined in the conveyor technical data pages (pages 10, 14, and 18). To choose a gear motor combination that
works best for the application, the next step is to convert that equivalent load into the torque required and size a drive based upon its use. The
user must know the belt speed (in feet per minute) and service factor (determined below). The steps below guide the user through this process.
These steps will utimately compare the torque required to move the load on the conveyor (Required Conveyor Drive Torque) and the torque the
drive train is capable of producing (Supplied Drive Train Torque).
1. Calculate Required Conveyor Drive Torque (RCDT) 1.

Enter the equivalent load the drive must handle (from pages 10, 14, or 18). Divide this number
by 6. The result equals the torque required for the application, or the required conveyor drive torque (RCDT). Enter
RCDT on Line One.
2. Select Belt Speed & Enter Drive Train Torque (DTT) 2.
Choose the belt speed from one of the following pages (33 or 37), and write down the drive train torque (DTT)
for the selected speed. Please note that if you are choosing a top or bottom drive, you may use either a timing
belt or a chain. For heavy duty drives (listed on page 37), the drive train torque is lower if using a timing belt.
Enter the drive train torque on Line Two.
3. Select Service Class and Enter Service Factor (SF) Service Class (I or II) 3.
Select a service class: Class I - Moderate loads with chain and sprocket or direct drive
Class II - Moderate loads with timing belt and pulley
Now select the service factor (SF) from Chart 30-A below based upon hours of operation per day and number of
starts and stops per hour. Enter the result on Line Three.
4. Calculate Supplied Drive Train Torque (SDTT) 4.

Divide the drive train torque (DTT) from #2 by the service factor (SF) from #3. This result equals the supplied
drive train torque (SDTT). Enter the result on Line Four.
Service Factor - Chart 30-A

5. Determine Functionality
Hours of Operation per Day
Compare Line 4 (the supplied drive train torque 24 16 8 2
[SDTT]) to Line 1 (the required conveyor drive torque
[RCDT]). If the SDTT is equal to or greater than RCDT, 2.3 2.0 1.8 1.6
then you have selected the proper drive. SDTT > 2.2 1.9 1.7 1.5 Class II
RCDT. If not, then:
2.1 1.8 1.6 1.4
Service Factor
A) Slow down the belt speed 2.0 1.7 1.5 1.3

B) Choose a wider conveyor
1.9 1.6 1.4 1.2
Class I
C) Consult factory
1.8 1.5 1.3 1.1
1.7 1.4 1.2 1.0
Starts and Stops per Hour 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Proceed to the next page for instructions on how to
use the remaining drive pages.
Example: Example:
Equivalent load = 100 (per conveyor technical data page) Equivalent load = 300 (per conveyor technical data page)
100 / 6 = 17 (RCDT) 300 / 6 = 50.0 (RCDT)
30 FPM (From page 33 - standard duty top drive - fixed speed) 50 FPM (From page 37 - heavy duty bottom drive - fixed speed)
33 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) 87 inch lbs. of torque (DTT)
Class II (using timing belt on a top drive) Class II (using timing belt on a bottom drive)
8 hours per day with no starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.5) 16 hours per day with (10) starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.7)
33 / 1.5 = 22 inch lbs. (SDTT) 87 / 1.7 = 51.1 inch lbs. (SDTT)
RCDT = 17 RCDT = 50.0

SDTT = 22 SDTT = 51.1
20 7 17 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque) 51.1 7 50.0 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)
How to Use the Following Pages
The following pages contain information on types and locations of available QC drives, presented in a clear, concise manner.
Simply follow the two-page spread from left to right, and note the steps listed here.
Mounting Drawings Drive locations Sizing information Voltage

Arrangement
Step 1:
Step 3 Step 5 Choose mounting
125 Series Standard Duty Drives
Standard Duty Electric
arrangement
Side or Remote Drive
Side Drive
Note:
Fixed Speed
Sizing Information Mounting Part Number Motor Part Number Motor Information*
& location
A 2.50 This mounting arrangement allows
for the drive to be mounted on either Example: M1-S3SE Example: 051-025
3.54 side of the conveyor with the motor Torque (DTT)
FPM Inch Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Prefix Voltage Ratio HP Voltage AMP *A
.50 inline with the drive pulley.
Reference the drawings to the left for 4.5 88 M1- S or R 1 or 3 SE- 05 1- 120 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 6.47
dimensional information. Reference
125 Series
10 76 M1- S or R 1 or 3 SE- 05 1- 050 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 6.47
5.57 the tables to the right for
Drive Location mounting package and 18 50 M1- S or R 1 or 3 SE- 05 1- 030 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 6.47
3 1 gearmotor ordering 21 41 M1- S or R 1 or 3 SE- 05 1- 025 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 6.47
1/19
3.50 .84 information. The box
.16 immediately left shows 30 33 M1- S or R 1 or 3 SE- 05 1- 018 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 5.89
4.00 .38 the possible drive 43 23 M1- S or R 1 or 3 SE- 05 1- 012 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 5.89
Front View Top View positions.
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location Chart *A from
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right 1 3
Variable Speed
drawing
Step 2:
Step 1 Remote Drive
3.08
Note:
This mounting arrangement allows for
Sizing Information
Torque (DTT)
Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-R1SE
Motor Part Number
Example: 05V-018
Motor Information
If top or bottom drive

A 1.26 O .28 the drive to be mounted away from FPM* inch Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Prefix Voltage Ratio HP Voltage AMP A*
the conveyor and on either side of the 2.5 - 5.0 77 M1- S or R 1 or 3 SE- 16 V 50 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1 7.16
5.57
4.88 4.00
conveyor, with the motor inline with
the drive pulley. Reference the
drawings to the left for dimensional
information. Reference the
6.0 - 12.0
10 - 20
40
27
M1-
M1-
S or R
S or R
1 or 3
1 or 3
SE-
SE-
16
16
V
V
40
30
1/19
1/19
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
1
1
7.16
7.16 mounting arrangement,
Drive Location tables to the right for 12 - 24 22 M1- S or R 1 or 3 SE- 25 V 20 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1 7.16
.27 1.31
4.25
2.00
.75
3 1 mounting package and
gearmotor ordering
information. The box
17 - 34
24.5 - 49
17
12
M1-
M1-
S or R
S or R
1 or 3
1 or 3
SE-
SE-
25
33
V
V
15
10
1/19
1/19
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
1
1
7.16
7.16
choose timing belt or
3.50 immediately left shows the *Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location Chart *A from
Front View
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right
Top View
1 3
possible drive positions.
Mounting Part Number Example:
M1-S1SE (Side Drive Mounting)
Motor Part No. Example:
051-120 (115v 1PH Gearmotor@4.5 FPM)
drawing
chain drive
Top or Bottom Drive
Note: Each speed has two
Top Drive
A + .31 Note:
This mounting arrangement allows
Fixed Speed
Mounting Part Number Motor Part Number Motor Information*
rows. The top row is timing
Sizing Information
3.50
for the drive to be mounted above
the conveyor belt, on either side of
the conveyor, and with the motor
FPM* Torque (DTT)
Inch Lbs.
Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525
Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt
Example: 051-025
Prefix Voltage Ratio HP Voltage AMP *A belt driven, and the bottom
inline with the drive pulley. Reference 4.5 88 (belt) 5M 25 25
9.50
3.39
3.50
5.61
the drawings to the left for
dimensional information. 11
88(chain)
76 (belt)
76 (chain)
M1-
M1-
T or B
T or B
1 or 3
1 or 3
SE-
SE-
CH
5M
CH
10
25
10
10
25
10
05
05
1-
1-
120
050
1/19
1/19
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV

0.9
0.9
6.47
6.47
row is chain driven
Drive Location Reference the tables to the
18 50 (belt) 5M 25 25
3 1 right for mounting package M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- 05 1- 030 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 6.47
50 (chain) CH 10 10
and gearmotor ordering 41 (belt) 5M 25 25
.38 information. The box 22 M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- 05 1- 025 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 6.47
41 (chain) CH 10 10
1.75 immediately left shows the
30 33 (belt) 5M 25 25
possible drive positions. M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- 05 1- 018 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 5.79
Front View Top View 33 (chain) CH 10 10
44 23 (belt) 5M 25 25
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right 1 3 23 (chain)
M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE-
CH 10 10
05 1- 012 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 5.79
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location Chart *A from
drawing
Variable Speed
Bottom Drive Sizing Information Mounting Part Number Motor Part Number Motor Information*
Example: M1-B3SE-5M2525 Example: 05V-012
Step 3:
Note:
1.75 Torque (DTT)
.33 This mounting arrangement allows FPM* Inch Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt Prefix Voltage Ratio HP Voltage AMP *A
for the drive to be mounted below the 77 (belt) 5M 25 25
2.5 - 5.0 M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- 05 V- 120 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1 7.16
conveyor belt, on either side of the 77 (chain) CH 10 10
conveyor, and with the motor inline 40 (belt) 5M 25 25
6.0 - 12.0 05 V- 050 115v 1PH TENV 1 7.16
Choose speed
with the drive pulley. Reference the M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- CH 10 10 1/19
40 (chain)
3.25 drawings to the left for dimensional 27 (belt) 5M 25 25
9.50 5.61 information. Reference the
10 - 20
27 (chain) M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- CH 10 10
05 V- 030 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1 7.16
3.50 Drive Location tables to the right for 5M 25 25
22 (belt)
12 - 24 M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- 05 V- 025 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1 7.16
3 1 mounting package and 22 (chain) CH 10 10
gearmotor ordering 17 (belt) 5M 25 25
.38 17 - 34 M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- CH 10 10
05 V- 018 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1 6.45
information. The box 17 (chain)
immediately left shows the 12 (belt) 5M 25 25
A 24.5 - 49 M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- 05 V- 012 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1 6.45
possible drive positions. 12 (chain) CH 10 10
Front View Top View *Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location Chart *A from
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right 1 3 Motor Part No. Example: drawing
M1-T3SE-5M2525 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt) 05V-050 (115v 1PH Gearmotor@6.0 TO 12.0 FPM)
Notes:
1. Speeds can be reduced to 1/10 of their stated speed and provides 88 inch lbs. of torque by using a decimal reducer (Part No. 125-0205-10x)
2. Above gearmotors are not UL, CSA, or CE approved See Drive Accessory Page for optional cords, switches,
3. Torque values are based upon start-up torque and plugs
32 QC Industries 513.753.6000 QC Industries 513.753.6000 33
Step 4:
Run drive sizing
calculations listed on
Step 4 Page 30
(p. 30)
Speed Mounting Voltage
Step 5:
Step 6 Choose voltage
Fixed Speed
requirements
Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525 Example: 051-025
FPM* Torque (DTT) Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt
Inch Lbs. Prefix Voltage Ratio HP Voltage AMP *A
4.5 88 (belt) 5M 25 25
M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- 05 1- 120 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 6.47
88(chain) CH 10 10
76 (belt) 5M 25 25
11
76 (chain)
CH 10 10
05 1- 050 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 6.47 Step 6:
50 (belt) 5M 25 25
18
50 (chain)
CH 10 10
05 1- 030 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 6.47 Put together two part
41 (belt) 5M 25 25
22
41 (chain)
CH 10 10
05 1- 025 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 6.47 numbers, drive
30 33 (belt)
33 (chain)
5M
CH
25
10
25
10
05 1- 018 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 5.79 mounting package and
44 23 (belt)
5M 25 25
05 1- 012 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 5.79
gearmotor, by following
23 (chain) CH 10 10
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location Chart *A from from left to right
drawing
Variable Speed Step 2
Torque Gear Reducer Horsepower Voltage Key
Sprocket/Timing Pulley 1 115VAC 1 PH

Combinations 3 230/460 VAC 3 PH
V 90 VDC w/controller
D 90 VDC w/o controller
125 Series Standard Duty Drives
Side Drive
Note:
for the drive to be mounted on either
A* 2.56 3.54 side of the conveyor with the motor
inline with the drive pulley.
.50 Reference the drawings to the left for
5.57 dimensional information. Reference
the tables to the right for
Drive Location mounting package and
3 1 gearmotor ordering
3.50 .84 .16 information. The box
.38
4.00 immediately left shows
the possible drive
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table on next page 1 3
Remote Drive
Note:
3.08 This mounting arrangement allows for
A* 1.26 .28 DIA. the drive to be mounted away from
the conveyor and on either side of the
4.88 4.00 drawings to the left for dimensional
5.57 information. Reference the
Drive Location tables to the right for
2.00 3 1 mounting package and
4.25 gearmotor ordering
.75
.27 1.31 3.50 immediately left shows the
Front View Top View possible drive positions.
Top Drive
Note:
A + .31 * This mounting arrangement allows
3.50
inline with the drive pulley. Reference
9.50 5.61 the drawings to the left for
3.39 ** 3.50 dimensional information.
3 1 right for mounting package
.38 and gearmotor ordering

**Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21
Bottom Drive
Note:
.33 1.75 This mounting arrangement allows
for the drive to be mounted below the
conveyor belt, on either side of the
conveyor, and with the motor inline
with the drive pulley. Reference the
3.00 drawings to the left for dimensional
9.50 5.61 information. Reference the
3.50 Drive Location tables to the right for
gearmotor ordering
.38 information. The box
A + .31 * immediately left shows the
Front View Top View
Standard Duty Electric
Fixed Speed
Example: M1-S3SE Example: 051-025
Torque (DTT)
FPM* Inch Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Prefix Voltage Ratio HP Voltage AMP *A
4.5 88 M1- S or R 1 or 3 SE 05 1- 120 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.7 6.47
10 76 M1- S or R 1 or 3 SE 05 1- 050 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.7 6.47
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location Chart *A from
drawing
Variable Speed
Sizing Information Mounting Part Number Motor Part Number Motor Information
Example: M1-R1SE Example: 05V-018
Torque (DTT) Prefix Mounting Suffix Prefix Voltage A*
FPM* Inch Lbs. Position* Ratio HP Voltage AMP
2.5 - 5.0 73 M1- S or R 1 or 3 SE 05 V- 120 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1 7.16
6 - 12 63 M1- S or R 1 or 3 SE 05 V- 050 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1 7.16
24.5 - 49 19 M1- S or R 1 or 3 SE 05 V- 012 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1 6.45
drawing
Mounting Part Number Example: Motor Part No. Example:
M1-S1SE (Side Drive Mounting) 051-120 (115v 1PH Gearmotor@4.5 FPM)
Top or Bottom Drive

Fixed Speed
Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525 Example: 051-025
FPM* Torque (DTT) Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt
Inch Lbs. Prefix Voltage Ratio HP Voltage AMP *A
4.5 88 5M 25 25
CH 10 10
11 76 5M 25 25
CH 10 10
18 50 5M 25 25
CH 10 10
22 41 5M 25 25
CH 10 10
30 5M 25 25
33 M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- 05 1- 018 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.7 5.79
CH 10 10
44 5M 25 25
23 M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- 05 1- 012 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.7 5.79
CH 10 10
drawing
Variable Speed
Example: M1-B3SE-5M2525 Example: 05V-012
FPM* Torque (DTT)
Inch Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt Prefix Voltage Ratio HP Voltage AMP *A
5M 25 25 05 V-
2.5 - 5.0 73 M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- 120 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1 7.16
CH 10 10
5M 25 25 05 V-
6 - 12 63 M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- 050 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1 7.16
CH 10 10
5M 25 25 05 V-
10 - 20 42 M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- 030 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1 7.16
CH 10 10
5M 25 25
12 - 24 34 M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- 05 V- 025 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1 7.16
CH 10 10
5M 25 25
17 - 34 27 M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- 05 V- 018 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1 6.45
CH 10 10
5M 25 25
24.5 - 49 19 M1- T or B 1 or 3 SE- 05 V- 012 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1 6.45
CH 10 10
Mounting Part Number Example: Motor Part No. Example: drawing
M1-T3SE-5M2525 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt) 05V-050 (115v 1PH Gearmotor@6 TO 12 FPM)
Notes:
1. Speeds can be reduced to 1/10 of their stated speed and provides 88 inch lbs. of torque by using a decimal reducer (Part No. 125-0205-10x)
2. Fixed speed motors are UL, cUL, and CE approved; however, the variable speed motor is not
See Drive Accessory Page (Page 39) for standard duty
3. Torque values are based upon start-up torque cords, switches, and plugs
125 Series Pneumatic Drives
Side Drive
Note:
This arrangement allows for the
drive to be mounted on either side
of the conveyor with the motor inline
8.59 .72 with the drive pulley. Reference the
.50
information. Reference the tables to
5.17 the right for mounting
2.93 Drive Location package and gearmotor
3 1 ordering information. The
.31
box immediately left
.38 shows the possible drive
positions.
Front View Top View
1 3
Remote Drive
Note:
This arrangement allows for the drive
5.93 .28 DIA. to be mounted away from the
conveyor and on either side of the
2.94 4.25 4.88 the drive pulley. Reference the
.75 gearmotor ordering
1.31
1 3
Top Drive
Note:
to be mounted above the conveyor
belt, on either side of the conveyor,
5.12 and with the motor inline with the
drive pulley. Reference the drawings
9.50 to the left for dimensional
2.93 * 3.50 information. Reference the
6.31
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21. 1 3
Bottom Drive
Note:
.33 This arrangement allows for the drive
to be mounted below the conveyor
and with the motor inline with the
2.56 drive pulley. Reference the drawings
9.50 to the left for dimensional
5.12
1.75 6.31
immediately left shows the
Front View Top View
1 3
Pneumatic
Example: M1-S3SA Example: 30A-015
FPM* Torque In. Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Prefix Voltage Ratio Vane Max PSI
14-144 See Chart Below M1- S or R 1 or 3 SA 30 A- 015 4 80
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location Chart

M1-S1SA 30A-015
Top Drive Mounting Package with Chain 4 Vane Reversible Pnuematic Motor
2.10
2.00
1.00 1/4-18 80 100
1.59
60
120
40
1/4-18 NPT NPT
140
20
0 160
1/4-18
NPT 3.42
1/4-18 NPT
.88 HEX
3.21
Needle Valve Filter, Regulator, Lubricator

Typical Arrangement
Part Number: 125-0034-VLV1 Part Number: 125-0034-FRL
The QC Industries Needle Valve acts as a throttling The QC Industries Filter, Regulator, and Lubricator has
device, and is sized to incrementally control the speed been sized to handle the flow and pressure
of the Standard Duty Pneumatic Drive requirements of the Standard Duty Pneumatic Drive
Top or Bottom Drive
Mounting Part Number Motor Part No. Motor Information

Sizing Information
Example: M1-T1SA-5M2525 Example: 30A-015
FPM* Torque In. Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr. Sprkt Conv Sprkt Prefix Voltage Ratio Vane Max PSI
See Chart 5M 25 25
14-144 M1- T or B 1 or 3 SA- 30 A- 015 4 80
See Chart CH 10 10
*See Drive Location Chart
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM
M1-T3SA-CH1010 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Chain) 30A-015 (4 Vane Reversible Pneumatic Motor)
Torque vs. Speed Air Consumption vs. Speed

100 24
80 P
SI
20
80
I
PS
80
CFM (Free Air) Consumption
60 P I
SI 16 PS
60
60
Torque Lbs. In.
12 SI
40 PS 40 P
I
40
8 20 PSI
20 PSI
20
4
0 0
0 36 72 108 144 0 36 72 108 144
Speed - FPM (Output) Speed - FPM (Output)
Notes:
1. Motor comes standard with muffler and in-line filter.
2. Speed should be controlled on the exhaust of air to preserve maximum torque output and a stable speed control.
3. Max speed is 61 FPM @ 80 PSI.
4. Both chain and timing belt drives have the same torque rating.
125 Series Heavy Duty Drives
Side Drive
Note:
B DIA.*
4.14
B DIA. * drive to be mounted on either side
.48 of the conveyor with the motor
perpendicular to the drive pulley.
A* Reference the drawings to the left for
3-G 1-J gearmotor ordering
1.34 information. The box
immediately left shows
.87 3.89 the possible drive
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page 1-J 3-G
Remote Drive
Note:
to be mounted away from the
B DIA. * B DIA. * conveyor and on either side of the
A* conveyor, with the motor
.44 DIA. perpendicular to the drive pulley.
Reference the drawings to the left for
2.75 .50 DIA. dimensional information.
1.74 Drive Location Reference the tables to the
3-J 1-G right for mounting package
2.88 and gearmotor ordering
3.75 1.12
Note: 56 frame gear motors extend below

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page 1-G 3-J
gear box mounting plate and may require
shimming
Top Drive
B DIA.* Note:
1.86 B DIA. * This arrangement allows for the drive
and with the motor perpendicular to
A*
9.50 5.68 **
3.50 3-G 1-J mounting package and
1.75 .38 immediately left shows the
**Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.
Bottom Drive
Note:
B DIA.*
1.75 .33 This arrangement allows for the drive
A*
3.50 3-J 1-G mounting package and
B DIA. * information. The box
1.86
.38 immediately left shows the
Front View Top View
The motor can be rotated in 90O Motor Dimension Chart

increments when attaching it to the 161 163 16V 251 253 25V 331 333 33V 501 503 50V 503 (ID)
gearbox. This allows the user flexibility
A 11.39 11.26 8.22 9.22 9.25 9.15 9.01 9.24 10.11 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08
when deciding where the motor
capacitor and work box will be located. B 5.20 4.69 4.98 5.19 5.20 4.99 6.20 5.20 5.01 6.15 6.19 4.98 7.23
Heavy Duty Electric
Fixed or Variable Speed
Side Drive
Example: M1-S1J0 Example: 161 - 50J Voltage
Torque (DTT) 115/230 230/460 DC
FPM* Inch Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Prefix Voltage Ratio Gearbox
Hand HP Amp Amp Amp Face
12 120 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 16 1,3,V,D- 50 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
15 128 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 16 1,3,V,D- 40 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
20 132 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 16 1,3,V,D- 30 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
30 130 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 25 1,3,V,D- 20 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 2.5 42C
40 128 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 25 1,3,V,D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 2.5 42C
60 107 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 33 1,3,V,D- 10 G or J 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
120 82 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 50 1,3,V,D- 05 G or J 1/2 7.4/3.7 2.1/2.0 4.8 56C
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM *See Drive Location Chart
Remote Drive
Example: M1-R1G0 Example: 251-20G Voltage
Torque (DTT) Gearbox 115/230 230/460 DC
FPM* Inch Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Prefix Voltage Ratio Hand HP Amp Amp Amp Face
12 120 M1- R 1G or 3J 0 16 1,3,V,D- 50 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
15 128 M1- R 1G or 3J 0 16 1,3,V,D- 40 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
20 132 M1- R 1G or 3J 0 16 1,3,V,D- 30 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
30 130 M1- R 1G or 3J 0 25 1,3,V,D- 20 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 2.5 42C
40 128 M1- R 1G or 3J 0 25 1,3,V,D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 2.5 42C
60 107 M1- R 1G or 3J 0 33 1,3,V,D- 10 G or J 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
120 82 M1- R 1G or 3J 0 50 1,3,V,D- 05 G or J 1/2 7.4/3.7 2.1/2.0 4.8 56C
Mounting Part Number Example: Motor Part No. Example: Voltage Key
M1-S3J0 (Side Drive Mounting) 253-15J (230/460v 3PH Gearmotor@40 FPM) 1 115 VAC 1 PH For optional AC controls, see p. 38
3 230/460 VAC 3 PH For optional AC controls, see p. 38
V 90 VDC w/controller See controller on p. 38
D 90 VDC w/o controller Customer to supply controller
Top or Bottom Drive
Sizing Information Mounting Part Number Motor Part No. Motor Information
Example: M1-B3J0-CH1410 Example: 503-05J Voltage
FPM* Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr. Sprkt Conv Sprkt Prefix Voltage Ratio Hand HP Face
Inch Lbs. Amp Amp Amp
95 (belt) 5M 25 25
12 M1- T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 0- 16 1,3,V,D- 50 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
120 (chain) or 3G CH 10 10
95 (belt) 5M 25 25
128 (chain) or 3G CH 10 10
98 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 25
20 M1- T or B or 3G
0- 16 1,3,V,D- 30 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
132 (chain) CH 10 10
93 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 25
30 M1- T or B or 3G
0- 25 1,3,V,D- 20 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 2.5 42C
130 (chain) CH 10 10
89 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 25
40 M1- T or B or 3G
0- 25 1,3,V,D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 2.5 42C
128 (chain CH 10 10
87 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 30 25
50 M1- T or B or 3G
0- 25 1,3,V,D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 2.5 42C
107 (chain) CH 12 10
84 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 25
60 M1- T or B or 3G 0- 33 1,3,V,D- 10 G or J 1/3 2.5/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
107 (chain) CH 10 10
89 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 30 25
100 (chain) CH 12 10
67 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 40 25
67 (chain) CH 16 10
82 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 25
82 (chain) CH 10 10
68 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 30 25
68 (chain) CH 12 10
59 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 34 25
59 (chain) CH 14 10
51 (belt) M1- T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 40 25
200 or 3G
0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 7.4/3.7 2.1/1.0 4.8 56C
51 (chain) CH 16 10
46 (belt) M1- T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 44 25
225 0- 50 1,3,V,D- 05 G or J 1/2 7.4/3.7 2.1/1.0 4.8 56C
46 (chain) or 3G CH 18 10
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM *See Drive Location chart

M1-T1J0-5M4025 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt) 331-10J (115v 1PH Gearmotor@100 FPM)
Notes:
1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved

2. Torque values are based upon running torque See Drive Accessories pages (p. 38 & 39) for
3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2 HP. Add an ID to the end of the motor part number for the 230/460VAC 3ph motors only. optional controllers, motor starters, e-stops,
4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them cords, switches, and plugs
125 Series Drive Accessories
Motor Controls
6.00
Specifications/Features:
5.00
115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1/2 hp max output
3X .19 DIA. 230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 1 hp max output
30:1 speed range
UL/ULc/CE
8.00 NEMA 1 Enclosure
5.00
Forward/Reverse switch, Run/Brake switch
Min/Max & Accel/Decel settings
To Order:
Part Number:
1.25 125-0054-01 Standard NEMA 1DC Control
3.45 125-0149-09* Wiring: cords & plugs
Standard DC Control *Includes 8’ cord from control to AC plug and 8’ cord from
2X .88 DIA. 2.50 control to motor with male/female disconnects (wired).
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly
wire this controller to the gearmotor
115/230 V AC, 1/3 phase, 50/60 hz input, 1 hp max output
10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor)
UL/ULc/CE
2.84 4.45
IP 20 Enclosure
2.40 3-digit LED display
Forward/Reverse switch
Run/Stop button, Accel/Decel buttons
Carrier frequency selectable for quiet operation
4.57 5.73 5.13 To Order:
Part Number:*
125-0054-5C-11-05 115V AC, 1 phase input, IP20
125-0054-5C-23-20 230 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20
4X .18 DIA. .34
Standard AC Control
5.63 Specifications/Features:
115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1 hp max output

.19 230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 2 hp max output
30:1 speed range
7.20
6.35 UL/ULc/CE
.85 NEMA 4X Enclosure
Speed adjustment potentiometer
Forward/Off/Reverse switch
5.16 Min/Max & Accel/Decel settings
2X 3/4 NPT To Order:

Part Number:
4.56 125-0054-38 NEMA 4X DC Control
2.12
This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty
Washdown DC Control environment.
2.20 1.20
115/230 V AC, 1 phase, 50/60 hz input, 3 phase out, 1 hp max output

.19 UL/ULc
7.20 NEMA 4X Enclosure
6.35
.85 Speed adjustment potentiometer
Run/Stop switch
5.16
To Order:
2X 3/4 NPT Part Number:
125-0054-37 NEMA 4X AC Control
4.56
2.12 This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty
Washdown AC Control environment.
2.20 1.20

Motion Controls
The Motor Starter is an overload protection that also

.25 DIA. 3.63 provides a means of using a Remote E-Stop for safety.
The starter is equipped with an undervoltage trip to
protect against autostarting after the overload condition
has been corrected. Also includes short circuit protection.
5.13 5.75
115 V AC, 1 phase, 60 hz input, 1/2 hp max
230 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max
2.00 460 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max
UL/CSA/CE
.72 Start/Stop buttons
IP55 Enclosure
To Order:
4X 1/2 DIA. KNOCKOUT Part Number:
Motor Starter 125-0054-38-115 115 V AC, 1ph w/enclosure
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly 125-0054-38-230 230 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure
wire motor starter and e-stops 125-0054-38-460 460 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure
The E-Stop accessory is mounted directly to the Motor

Starter enclosure, providing a means of stopping the motor
TURN TO RELEASE for safety. It can be padlocked for servicing, and contains a
E-STOP start button for restarting the motor after the pushbutton
2.50 3.13 has been released.
Turn to release
2.25 UL/CSA/CE
E-Stop can be locked out/includes start button
IP55 Rated
Note: Mounts directly to motor starter enclosure

5.88 LOCK-OUT
TAG-OUT
To Order:
E-Stop Accessory Part Number:
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly ELECT-061 E-Stop Accessory for Motor Starter
wire motor starter and e-stops
The Remote E-Stop provides a means for locking out power

3.50
to the motor for safety. It includes an IP65 enclosure and
3.00 mounting bracket to allow the E-Stop to be mounted directly
2X .22 DIA.
to the side of the conveyor frame.
2.67 2.89 Turn to release
UL/CSA/CE
IP65 Enclosure
2.37 2.75
To Order:
3.76 Part Number:
ELECT-063-WBRKT E-Stop with enclosure
Remote E-Stop Note: Includes mounting bracket to mount to conveyor frame

Optional Cords, Plugs, & Switches
Standard Duty Motor Options Heavy Duty Motor Options

Part Number Description Part Number Description
125-0149-01 Fixed speed standard duty electric motor ON/OFF switch 125-0149-05 ON/OFF switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor
125-0149-02 Fixed speed standard duty electric motor FORWARD/REVERSE switch 125-0149-06 FORWARD/REVERSE switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor
125-0149-03 Variable speed standard duty electric motor FORWARD/REVERSEswitch 125-0149-07 8’ cord and plug for 1 PH heavy duty motor
125-0149-04 Fixed speed standard duty electric motor 8’ cord and plug 125-0149-09 8’ cord and plug for 90VDC motor - see controller for details
Double Universal Joint
4.88 MAX 3.25 The Double Universal Joint with

1/8 KEYWAY 2X 11/32 bearing mount is used to couple a
1.40 HOLES 2.50 remote mounted motor with a
1.69 conveyor drive shaft when there is
0.6
not common shaft alignment. This
assembly should be used with Drive
2.75 End Mounts.
.50 DIA.
BORE 1.50 1.34 Note: Torque rating of universal joint
at average angle of 15O (.375 offset)
1.00 DIA. 0.75 MAX
1.09 1/2 HEX and 350 rpm is 125 inch lbs. Higher
Part No. 125-0148-00 speeds and angle will reduce rating.
(with bearing mount)
Part No. 125-0148-03 CAUTION: Universal joint must be guarded.
(without bearing mount) (Guarding is the responsibility of the end user.)
Single Piece Flex Coupling
2.50 Part Number A B *Torque Rating

A (Inch Lbs.)
The Single Piece Flex Coupling is
125-0009-02 .5 in. diameter .5 in. diameter 100
used to couple the remote mounted
motor with the conveyor drive shaft.
125-0009-03 .5 in. diameter .5 in. hex 100 This coupling can also be used to
w/keyway couple between gang driven
conveyors.
125-0009-06 .5 in. hex .5 in. hex 100
1.62
B
*Value based on non-reversing applications with an

angular offset of up to 5O.
Three Piece Flex Coupling
*Torque Rating The Three Piece Flex Coupling is

2.0 Part Number A B
1.37 (Inch Lbs.) used to couple the remote mounted
motor with the conveyor drive shaft.
A
125-0135-00 .5 in. diameter .5 in. hex 114 This coupling can also be used to
w/keyway couple between gang driven
conveyors. This coupling is used on
B 125-0135-01 .625 in. diameter .5 in. hex 114
w/keyway all side drives.
1.06 DIA. Note: Use of the three piece flex
125-0135-02 .5 in. hex .5 in. hex 114
.97 DIA. coupling may require the 1/2” hex
shaft retaining collar (Part No.
125-0135-07 .5 in. diameter .5 in. diameter 114 125-0078-026) to prevent separation.
1/2” Hex Shaft Retaining Collar
Part No. 125-0078-026 Please consult factory.
*Value based on standard duty non-reversing
applications with an angular offset of up to 1O. For
heavy duty applications, divide torque by 2.
Drive Extension Shaft Drive Extension Shaft Support Block
3.25 2X 11/32
HOLES
LE 2.50
NG
TH
Length Part No. 1/2 HEX

23 in. 125-0005-23 7/ 8 1/2
1 1/ 4 2.75 1.34
35 in. 125-0005-35
1/2 HEX
47 in. 125-0005-47
Part No. 125-0148-05
59 in. 125-0005-59 The Drive Extension Shaft can be The Drive Extension Shaft Support
71 in. 125-0005-71 used to gang drive multiple Block is used to support lengths of
conveyors and/or for power take-off shaft not supported by the drive
83 in. 125-0005-83 of remote drives. coupling or a conveyor.
95 in. 125-0005-95
Typical Gang Drive Examples
Bottom Drive withTwo Flex Couplings
Note 1:
This typical gang drive application shows a

1ESBH06-120-ASQ-MAA
bottom drive mounting arrangement. The
125-0009-03 couplings and drive extension shaft are
125-0005-23 shown on the opposing page. Please note
that the conveyor to which the drive is
125-0009-03
attached has a “D” designator in the drive
pulley portion of the part number.
1ESBH06-120-ADQ-MAA
M1-B1G0-5M2525
161-50G
Side Drive with Through Shaft & Drive End Mounts
125-0013-00
Note 2:
1ESBH06-120-AHQ-MAA This typical gang drive application shows a

125-0014-00 side drive mounting arrangement. The drive
end mounts are shown on page 27, and
125-0005-23
drive extension shafts are shown on the
125-0013-00 opposing page. Please note that the
conveyor to which the drive is nearest has
1ESBH06-120-AHQ-MAA
an “H” designator in the drive pulley portion
161-50J 125-0015-00 of the part number.
M1-S1J0-HEX* *Non-Standard Part Number
Remote Drive with Flex Couplings
Note 3:
This typical gang drive application shows a

1ESBH06-120-ASQ-MAA remote drive mounting arrangement. The
125-0009-03 couplings and drive extension shafts are
shown on the opposing page. Please note
125-0005-23 that the conveyor to which the drive is
125-0009-03 nearest has a “D” designator in the drive
161-50G 125-0148-03 pulley portion of the part number.
M1-R1G0 1ESBH06-120-ADQ-MAA
How to Order
The examples above help illustrate how to assemble part numbers for typical applications. The following shows the steps needed
to correctly size a gang driven application:
Step One: Add up the equivalent load for each conveyor you plan to gang drive. (Using pages 10, 14, and/or 18)
Step Two: Size a drive based upon the total equivalent load from Step One
Step Three: Determine which type of drive arrangement you need: side, remote, top, or bottom (Using page 32, 34, or 36)
Step Four: Change the drive pulley digit of the conveyor part number to reflect which drive arrangement you are using. "D" for top
or bottom drives and "H" for side or remote drives. Conveyor Part number example: 1ESBH04-060-ADQ-MAA - The "D"
designates a dual output drive pulley to be used in a gang driven application using a top or bottom drive. The “H” designates a hex
input pulley to be used in a gang driven application using a side or remote drive.
Step Five: Determine the couplings and drive extension shaft needed, using the above diagrams as a guide. This information can
be located on the opposing page
Step Six: Ensure that the couplings can handle the torque requirements of the system. Reference page 40
Please consult the factory if you have questions.
125 Series Automation Accessories
Motion Detection
• Compact design
• Easy to retrofit into existing conveyors
• Magnetic proximity sensor allows for
4 PIN 2 WIRE RECEPTACLE
dependable operation in harsh
Motion detection can be used in all CLAMPED IN FRAME operating environments
applications where it is necessary to • Provides one pulse per tail pulley
know the conveyor belt is running revolution
while other machines are operating. 4 PIN 2WIRE CONNECTOR
QC’s motion detection system 1.00
monitors your conveyor and provides a PROX SENSOR .86
“belt running” signal to your machine
conrtrol system or PLC. #10-32 F.H.C.S.
SPRING ALLOWS SENSOR MOVEMENT

FOR QUICK BELT CHANGE
.63
.54
.06
.75
6.06
.63
1 1 BROWN (+) Electrical Specifications:
.60 Supply Voltage - 24 VDC
2 4 2 N/A
3 3 BLUE (-) Load Current - 200 mA, normally open
4 N/A Operating Temperature:
-25O to +70OC (-13OF to +158OF)
PIN CONFIGURATION
Motion Detection Retrofit Kit Installed Motion Detection Kit
Conveyor Width Part No. Includes: Conveyor Width Part No. Includes:
2 in. 125-0335-02 (1) 4-pin two wire male connector 2 in. 125-0340-02 (1) 4-pin two wire male connector
3 in. 125-0335-03 (1) 4-pin two wire female connector 3 in. 125-0340-03 (1) 4-pin two wire female connector
4 in. 125-0335-04 (1) Mounting block and spring assembly 4 in. 125-0340-04 (1) Mounting block and spring assembly
6 in. (1) Mounting hardware kit 6 in. 125-0340-06 (1) Mounting hardware kit
125-0335-06
(1) Template for mounting hole transfer 8 in. (1) Detectable tail assembly exchanged
8 in. 125-0335-08 125-0340-08
(1) Detectable tail assembly for the standard tail assembly
10 in. 125-0335-10 10 in. 125-0340-10
(1) Proximity sensor (1) Proximity sensor
12 in. 125-0335-12 12 in. 125-0340-12 (1) Installation of sensor kit into conveyor
18 in. 125-0335-18 Note: This kit can only be ordered for installation 18 in. 125-0340-18
of motion detection into an existing conveyor in Note: This kit can only be ordered with the
24 in. 125-0335-24 the field 24 in. 125-0340-24 purchase of a new conveyor
Note: Holes to be drilled in the field by the Note: Please denote a “D” in the tail pulley portion
customer. of conveyor part number
Drip Pans
Features:
Attaches to standard width and length
conveyors, and is ideal for recapturing
oils and lubricants.
1/2-14 NPT Note: Designed for use with fixed side
rails that use side rail clamps and the
universal adjustable side mount only.
1/2-14 NPT
To Order:
Fill in the last five digits of the part
number with the width and length of the
conveyor it is to be used on.
Part No. 125-0403- - Part No. 125-0403-WW-LLL
Automation Accessories
90O Transfer Plate Inline Transfer Plate
Conveyor Width Part No.

2 in. 125-0230-02 Conveyor Width Part No.
3 in. 125-0230-03 2 in. 125-0220-02
4 in. 125-0230-04 3 in. 125-0220-03
6 in. 125-0230-06 4 in. 125-0220-04
8 in. 125-0230-08 6 in. 125-0220-06
10 in. 125-0230-10 8 in. 125-0220-08
12 in. 125-0230-12 10 in. 125-0220-10
18 in. 125-0230-18 12 in. 125-0220-12
24 in. 125-0230-24 18 in. 125-0220-18
24 in. 125-0220-24
Notes:
Transfer plates are not intended for use with Note:
high friction or cleated belts. Transfer plates are not intended for use
with high friction or cleated belts.
Discharge conveyor must be pushing.
Customer to drill screw holes to mount plate.
Pivot Mount Set Custom Rolling Nosebars
Note: Note:
The pivot mount attaches to the tail The rolling nosebar can be used
end of the conveyor and enables a with a conveyor running less than 60
pivot point from which other devices fpm and carrying less than 5 lbs. per
can lift the conveyor. Includes left inch of conveyor width.
and right hand mount.
To Order:
To Order: Please denote an ‘SAF’ in the belt portion
Part No. 125-0172-00 of the conveyor part number, and an ‘R’
for the tail pulley part of the conveyor part
number.
Example: 1ESBH04-048-ASR-SAF
Adjustable Stops Adjustable Diverters
To Order:
Note:
1. Select an adjustable stop for 1”
sides, 2” sides, or single tee slot The adjustable diverter comes with a
(See pages 22 -24) 5’ piece of UHMW rail and (2)
mounting assemblies that the user
2. Using the chart below, fill in the can utilize to help orient the product
part number using the nominal width around a 90O transfer.
of the conveyor for the last two digits
of the part number
Part No.
1” Sides 125-0232-WW
2” Sides 125-0234-WW
Single Tee Slot 125-0233-WW
Example: 125-0232-04
End Stop for a 4” wide conveyor that has To Order:
1” aluminum side rails with wear strip Part No. 125-0250-000
Specifications
• Speed Range up to 225 fpm*
• Conveyor made from corrosion resistant
components for wipe-down applications
Overview Dimensions
6.13
.75
.42
W + .31 = W - .10 =
FRAME WIDTH BELT WIDTH W + 2.33
Note: As in all
industries, technical 1.00 SHAFT
.50 DIA.
specifications will 1/8 SQ. KEY LENGTH
change with 1.89 *
technology updates.
Please consult
factory or see
.75
date drawings.
Features & Benefits
Conveyor
areas
• Corrosion resistant construction is achieved by replacing steel components with stainless steel
or electroless nickel plated components to help prevent or minimize rust. Bearings are filled
with food grade grease instead of standard grease. Anodized aluminum is used on some
surfaces as well as on many of our side and guide rail profiles
• High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in
over 50 various types
• All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art
manufacturing equipment
Tail Pulley Assembly Drive Assembly

• Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking,
• Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle
and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with food
bearings with seals that are filled with grade grease
food grade grease
• Thrust washers designed into the drive
• Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the
assembly provide axial float, which allows assembly to move with the natural camber of
the assembly to move with the natural the belt and protect bearings against off-
camber of the belt and protect bearings center load conditions
against off-center load conditions
• Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down
while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during time during lubrication
lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions
providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt
idler end of the conveyor tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
• Drive pulley available in solid output design or dual output design
Technical Data

450
A conveyor application that is accumulating a 5-pound load, for example, 400
demands the conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we have 350
300
250
Lbs.
requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gear motor 200 200
150 150 150
125
100 100 100
87.5
1. Nominal Load 1. 50
75
50
75
50 25 37.5
6 8 10 2 12 183 24 4
cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Belt Width
Use Figure 46-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Pushing (Drive Location C&D)
nominal load you need to carry, to ensure it can carry the load. Each conveyor Note: See page 47
width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing and drive
pulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.
2. Accumulation 2.
If the application does not have an accumulating load, enter zero on Line
Two. Otherwise, multiply the nominal load times an accumulation factor. (0.2 Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 46-B
for accumulation belts listed on page 52 and 0.3 for MAA standard urethane).
Enter result on Line Two.
3.0 3.1
3.0
2.9
3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] = 3. 2.5 2.6

2.8
2.5
2.3
Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not 2.0 2.1
require an incline or decline enter zero on Line Three. For inclining or 1.8
declining applications choose a factor from Figure 46-B based upon the 1.5 1.6
One. Enter result on Line Three. 1.0 1.1
0.8
0.5
4. Side Seals 4. 0.3
0.6
0.0 0.0
If the application does not call for side rails with seals to prevent small
parts from getting under the rail, enter zero on Line Four. Otherwise Angle 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
multiply the conveyor length in feet by 5. The side rails can be found on
Factor 0.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1
page 54. Example: 96" long conveyor with side seals would have a factor

After adding lines one through four together, please reference
carry the sum of Lines One through Four. If the sum is greater
than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen,
200
please choose a wider conveyor or consult the factory. 168
132
5. Conveyor Friction 5. 150
Equivalent Load
100 84
nominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factored 72
in, add 4 to the conveyor width in inches, then multiply by 6, or simply 60
choose the value from Figure 46-C. Enter result on Line Five. 48
50 42
36

Conveyor Width 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (see Frictional Load 36 42 48 60 72 84 96 132 168
pages 116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a
gear motor (see pages 60-65).
How to Order
Drive Location
Construction
Drive Pulley
Frame Style
Drive Type
Tail Pulley
Length
Length
Length
Frame
Series
Width
Width
Belt
Belt
Belt
1 E R H - - -
Step 1
R = Corrosion E = 1.81” Stainless Steel

1 = 125 E = End Drive H = Straight Frame
Resistant B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige)
Step 2
Widths Lengths*
2” 3” 4” 6” 8” 10” 12” 18” 24” 24” 36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144”
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24 024 036 048 060 072 096 120 144
Step 3
Drive Location
Drive Pulley Type Tail Pulley Type
C D
d d
ar Cap 1/2” Dia* ar
an
d S an
d
Standard Q
n
io 41
A B pt g. 1/2” Dia* 1/2” Dia*
Oep D
A&B are drive pulling se Dual Output
C&D are drive pushing

Step 4 track the pre-tensioned belt and quality
Choose three-digit belt ordering code on pages 52-53. the customer. Accessories such as Drives,
Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packaged
separately and are shipped unassembled
Example: 1EREH03-048-ASQ-MAA with the conveyor to prevent damage
125 Series conveyor with corrosion resistant construction and 1.81” during shipment. Complete assembly can
stainless steel frame. Conveyor measures 3” wide by 48” long with solid be provided upon request; please contact
our factory for details.
output pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the A
position. The conveyor has a standard urethane belt.
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Cleated Conveyors
Specifications
• Speed Range up to 225 fpm*
• Conveyor made from corrosion resistant
components for wipe-down applications
Overview Dimensions
.75 6.13
.42
W + 2.33
Note: As in all
industries, technical W - 1.37 =
CLEAT WIDTH .50 DIA. 1.00 SHAFT
specifications will CLEAT HEIGHT
SEE PAGE 51 1/8 SQ. KEY LENGTH
change with 1.89 *
technology updates.
Please contact
factory or see
date drawings.

Features & Benefits
Conveyor
areas
• Corrosion resistant construction is achieved by replacing steel components with stainless steel
or electroless nickel-plated components to help prevent or minimize rust. Bearings are filled
with food grade grease instead of standard grease. Anodized aluminum is used on some
surfaces as well as on many of our side and guide rail profiles
various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired
spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt
Corrugated sides
available with
1 inch cleats
Multiple cleat sizes and styles available
See page 51 Step 4 for options
the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt
• Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that
tracking and is equipped with superior are filled with food grade grease
needle bearings with seals that are filled • Thrust washers designed into the drive
with food grade grease assembly provide axial float, which allows the
• Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly to move with the natural camber of
assembly provide axial float, which allows the belt and protect bearings against off-
the assembly to move with the natural center load conditions
camber of the belt and protect bearings • Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each
against off-center load conditions bearing housing allows for lubrication of
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during
while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication
providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
idler end of the conveyor • Drive pulley available in solid output design or dual output design
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Cleated Conveyors
Technical Data
Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 50-A

system that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namely 450 450
equivalent load.
400
the conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we have developed 300
300
certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry. 250
250 225
Lbs.
Follow the three steps below to determine the equivalent load your 200 200
175
application requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gear 150 150 150
motor arrangement that will provide the correct torque 125
100 100 100
75 87.5
75
50 50 37.5 50
25
6 8 2 3 4 10 12 18 24
Belt Width
Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12) Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Pushing (Drive Location C&D)
cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Note: See page 51
Use Figure 50-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the
nominal load you need to carry, to ensure it can carry the load. Each
conveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive
pushing and drive pulling applications.
Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.

3.0 3.1
3.0
2.9
2.8
require an incline or decline enter zero on Line Two. For inclining or 2.5 2.6
2.5
declining applications choose a factor from Figure 50-B based upon the 2.3
2.1
One. 1.8
1.5 1.6
Enter result on Line Two. 1.4
1.0 1.1
0.8
**Verify Load Capacity: 0.5 0.6
After adding lines One and Two together, please reference 0.3
STOP Figure 50-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will 0.0 0.0
carry the sum of Lines One through Two. If the sum is greater
than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, Angle 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
please choose a wider conveyor. Factor 0.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1
the value from Figure 50-C.
132
150
Enter result on Line Three.
Equivalent Load
96
100 84
72
60
48
36
Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (see
0
pages 116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a
gear motor (see pages 60-65). Conveyor Width 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
Frictional Load 36 42 48 60 72 84 96 132 168
How to Order
Drive Location
Construction
Drive Pulley
Frame Style
# of Cleats
# of Cleats
# of Cleats
Drive Type
Tail Pulley
Length
Length
Length
Frame
Series
Width
Width
Belt
Belt
Belt
1 E R H - - -
Step 1
R = Corrosion E = 1.81” Stainless Steel

1 = 125 E = End Drive H = Straight Frame
Resistant B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige)
Step 2
Widths Lengths*
2” 3” 4” 6” 8” 10” 12” 18” 24” 24” 36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144”
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24 024 036 048 060 072 096 120 144
Step 3

C D
d d
ar Cap 1/2” Dia* ar
an
d S an
d
Standard Q
n
io 41
pt g. 1/2” Dia* 1/2” Dia*
Oep D
A B se Dual Output
A&B are drive pulling
Step 4
Choose a base belt material and cleat height
Cleat Height 5mm 19mm 1/2” 3/4” 1” w/corr. sides 1” 2” 3”

MAA (Standard Urethane) CAB CAD CAE CAF CAH CAG CAI CAK
UAC (White Urethane) CBB CBD CBE CBF CBH CBG CBI CBK
Note 1: All belts must have a cleat indent of width minus 1.37”, except 1” cleats with corrugated sidewall. That cleat indent is width minus 3.62”
Note 2: Cleated belts are intended for use in conjunction with indented or adjustable guides (see page 23)

check every conveyor before we ship to the
Determine the total number of cleats on the conveyor. Multiply conveyor length (in inches) by customer. Accessories such as Drives,
2, divide by the desired spacing between the cleats (in inches). This will result in the total Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packaged
number of cleats evenly spaced around the circumference of the belt. Note: Must have a separately and are shipped unassembled
whole number of cleats. with the conveyor to prevent damage during
shipment. Complete assembly can be
Example: 1EREH08-048-ASQ-CAE016 provided upon request; please contact our
125 Series conveyor with corrosion resistant construction and 1.81” stainless steel frame. factory for details.
Conveyor measures 8” wide by 48” long with solid output pulley and standard tail pulley. The
drive output shaft is in the A position. The conveyor belt has a 1/2” high cleat every 6”.
ng
n
ptio
(°F)
ture Operati
l
teria
on ( ficient
)
scri
ches
ture
e
pera rt
)
Cod
(°F)
CoF
e Ma
a
e De
rm P
t
s (in
Tem Ambien
of F de Coef
Thic ge Bel
ring
tic
ac
ac
rt Te
Colo
knes
Tem
pera
Orde
Surf
-Sta
Surf
ricti
ra
si
.
Sho
Max
Ave
FDA
Anti
Max
Belt
Top
Top
Belt
Top
Multi-Purpose Belts
C. Option #2-Spill Edge Cleat MAC Longitudinal Serrated Cleat Urethane White YES LOW 212 176 YES 0.075
D. Option #3-Perforated Belt MAD Smooth, Perforations Urethane White YES LOW 212 176 YES 0.075
High Friction Belts
C. Beige FDA High Adhesion FAC Smooth Silicone Beige YES HIGH 212 176 YES 0.072
D. Black Lateral Grooved High Adhesion FAD Longitudinal Groove PVC Black NO HIGH 194 158 YES 0.083
E. Black Rough Top High Adhesion FAF Rough Top PVC Black NO HIGH 212 176 YES 0.185
C. Smooth White FDA Silicone Heat Resistor HAC Smooth Silicone White YES MED 400 350 NO 0.085
D. Blue Nitrile Heat Resistor HAD Coarse Structure Nitrile Rubber Blue NO MED 300 212 YES 0.079
E. White Nitrile Heat Resistor HAE Smooth Nitrile Rubber White NO MED 300 212 YES 0.067
Cut Resistant Belts
A. Yellow Cut Resistor IAA Smooth Urethane Yellow NO LOW 230 194 YES 0.060
B. Standard Urethane IAB Smooth Urethane White YES LOW 212 176 YES 0.075
C. Black Dimple Top Cut Resistor IAC Dimple Top Hard Urethane Black NO HIGH 248 212 YES 0.083
D. Rugged Poly Cut Resistor IAD Structured Nitrile Rubber Black NO MED 176 176 YES 0.100
FDA Belts
Translucent Belts

Non-Marking Belts
A. Green Sawtooth Profile Belt SAA Sawtooth PVC Green NO HIGH 212 176 YES 0.177
B. White Grooved Rubber SAB Lateral Groove Nitrile Rubber White YES HIGH 225 225 NO 0.210
C. Stipple Top PVC Profile SAC Stipple Top PVC White YES MED 212 176 NO 0.106
D. Negative Pyramid Profile SAD Textured Urethane White YES MED 212 176 YES 0.078
E. Green Longitudinal PVC Profile Belt SAE Longitudinal Groove PVC Green NO HIGH 175 175 YES 0.175

QC Industries offers conveyor belting for a contact one of our sales engineers directly at To Order Belt Only:
wide variety of applications and industries. the factory to discuss your application Choose nominal conveyor width and length in
These pages cover a number of the more parameters. inches and enter the three-digit belt code.
popular belts we have provided through the
years. These belts have all been tested at QC To Order With Conveyor: 1E - WW - LLL -
Industries and offer a compatible fit to the 125 Please use the three-digit QC belt code
Example: 1E-08-120-MAA
Series conveyors. If you have a specific need number for conveyor ordering on pages 47
Standard urethane belt for an 8” wide by 120”
that is not covered on these pages, please and 51.
long 125 Series conveyor
Multi-Purpose Belts
AA AB AC AD
M M M M
QUICK SHIP!
High-Friction Belts
A B C D F
FA FA FA FA FA
A C D E
AA AA AA AA
A B C D E
HA HA HA HA HA
Cut-Resistant Belts
A B C D
IA IA IA IA
FDA/USDA Belts
A B C D E
UA UA UA UA UA

A B C D
EA EA EA EA
Translucent Belts
A B C
TA TA TA
A B C D E
PA PA PA PA PA
Non-Marking Belts
A B C D
NA NA NA NA
A B C D E
RA RA RA RA RA
A B C D E
SA SA SA SA SA

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Side & Guide Rails
Fixed Side Rails
W + 1.06 W + 1.06
W + 1.06
W - .61 W - .19
W + .06
.46 *
.33 * .33 *
2.22 2.22 2.35
Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides
1/3” Side Rails Part No. 125R-0153- with seals** with wear strip
Part No. 125R-0169- Part No. 125R-0170-
125R-0169 pictured
Ex. 125R-0153-048 Ex. 125R-0169-096 Ex. 125R-0170-024
W + 1.19
W + 1.19
W + 1.19
W + .06
W + .06 W - .19
W - .61
.93 * .78 1.03 * .88
.78
.93 *
2.81 2.81 2.91

2.03 2.03 2.03
Aluminum extruded 1” high sides Aluminum extruded 1” high sides Aluminum extruded 1” high sides
1” Side Rails with seals** with wear strip
Part No. 125R-0174-
Part No. 125R-0177- Part No. 125R-0178-
125R-0178 pictured
Ex. 125R-0174-048 Ex. 125R-0177-024 Ex. 125R-0178-096
W + 1.19 W + 1.19 W + 1.19

W + .06
W + .06 W - .18
W - .61
1.93 * 1.78 1.93 * 1.78 2.05 * 1.90
3.81 3.93
3.81
2.03 2.03 2.03
Part No. 125R-0215- with seals** with wear strip
125R-0215 pictured Part No. 125R-0217- Part No. 125R-0216-
Ex. 125R-0215-024 Ex. 125R-0217-036 Ex. 125R-0216-060
Note 1: W = nominal belt width in inches * Dimension reflects use of standard urethane belt (MAA) see pages 52-53
Note 2: All rails are sold in sets ** Side seals are not intended for cleated belts, high friction belts, or belt speeds exceeding 30 FPM
Note 3: Side rails start 1 11/16” from tail end and stop 3 1/2” from drive end
W - .10 W - .25
MAX. 3.00 MAX.
3.00
ADJ. ADJ.
2.50 MAX. *
1.13 MIN. * 3.25 MAX. *
1.99 MIN. *
4.34
W + 2.81 W + 2.81
W + 9.12 MAX
W + 9.12 MAX.
Part No. 125R-0281- - Part No. 125R-0282- -
125R-0281-048-T pictured
W - .38
3.00 MAX. To Order:
ADJ. Fill in the last three digits of part number with the nominal length
of the conveyor. Choose a set screw adjustment or a thumb
wheel adjustment mechanism by indicating (S) for set screw and
5.25 MAX. * (T) for thumb wheel at the end of the part number.
3.00 MIN. *
Example 125R-0281-120-T
adjustment for a 120” long conveyor
The 2-Axis Adjustable Guides are designed to guide the product

being conveyed. The rails can adjust vertically and horizontally,
W + 2.81 offering the end user the ultimate in flexibility. Choose from a set
screw or thumb wheel adjustment. The thumb wheel is shown in
W + 9.12 MAX. the above picture and is ideal for quick adjustments, because no
3” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides tools are required.
Part No.125R-0283- -
W + 1.57
W + 1.42
W - 1.21
W - 1.21
2.40 MAX. *
2.13 MIN. *
3.94
3.28
1.62 MAX. *
1.03 MIN. *

Indented Guides Part No.125R-0219- Part No.125R-0218-
125R-0219 pictured
W + 1.57
W - 1.31
To Order:
Example 125R-0219-120
3.03 * 1” adustable guide rail with wear strip for a 120” long
conveyor
4.92
The Indented Guides are designed to work with cleated belts.
Each cleated belt is indented slightly (see page 51). The
Indented Guide spans the indentation, providing a pocket
which surrounds the product being conveyed.

Part No.125R-0222-
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Side & Guide Rails
Tee Slotted Extrusions
10-32 UNF THRU To Order:

.25 Use part number
125R-0074-035 (Qty. 1)
125R-0074-035-SET (Qty. 4)
The Rotate-In Tee Nut is designed to

.19
hold lightweight brackets that have a
thickness of .148” or under
.86
The Rotate-In Tee Nut can be used
with the following rails:
Rotate-In Tee Nut 1” - 125R-0174, 125R-0177, 125R-0178
Part No. 125R-0074-035 (Qty 1) 2” - 125R-0215, 125R-0217, 125R-0216
Rotate-In Tee Nut Part No. 125R-0074-035-SET (Qty 4)
Tee-125R-0225, 125R-0199
125R-0074 pictured
Note:
The Rotate-In Tee Nut works with the 1” and 2” side rails, as well as the
Single Tee Slot extrusion and the Multi Tee Slot extrusion.
W + 2.68
W + 1.28
W + 1.50
.73 * .73 *
1.16 1.16
Multi Tee-Slot Side Assembly Single Tee-Slot Side Assembly
Part No.125R-0225- Part No. 125R-0199-
Multi Tee Slot Single Tee Slot
To Order: To Order:
Fill in last three digits of part number Fill in last three digits of part number
with the nominal conveyor length in with the nominal conveyor length in
inches. Part number includes one set inches. Part number includes one set
as shown in drawing. as shown in drawing.
*Dimensions reflect use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.
Product Containment Accessories
LANES
Custom Sides Available

RAIL CLEARANCE
2" OR 3" A number of other side options exist to
meet the demands of a wide variety of
applications. Please call our factory for
RAILS
details.
Lane Dividers Lane Dividers

For part number see below
To Order:
LD R
Example
Construction (R - Corrosion Resistant)
LD-2-08144-12FR
Mounting Type (F - Frame or T - Tee slot) 2” Lane Divider for 8” wide 144” long
# of Lanes (2,3,4 etc) conveyor. One rail with two lanes
# of Rails (1, 2, 3, etc) mounted to the conveyor frame
Conveyor Length (in inches)
Conveyor Width (in inches)
Rail Clearance Height (2” or 3”)
Flared Side Rails
applications that require a
“drop zone” wider than the
W + 10.35 MAX. width of the conveyor. The
W + 4.41 MIN. rails attach to and require the
use of the adjustable guide
rails shown at the top of page
45° W + 4.97 MAX.
W - .97 MIN. 55. Additionally, the user can
add other components (shown
below) to help guide the
product as needed. Note: Flared
4.00 Side Rails should be ordered one
size smaller than the nominal
length of the conveyor.
Flared Side Rails To Order:
Z-1004-012 12” length

Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide
Z-1004-018 18” length
(sold separately) Part # 125R-0282-LLL Z-1004-024 24” length
Z-1004-030 30” length
Z-1004-036 36” length
Z-1004-042 42” length
L .25 Z-1004-048 48” length
Example:
(1) Z-1004-036
5.74 MAX. * A set of 36” long flared side rails
4.93 MIN. *
The rails are sold in sets and include

mounting hardware
Note: Requires Part #125-0282-LLL

shown on page 55
L = length of flared side rails
End Stops are used in conjunction with the

Flared Side Rail. Stops are adjustable down
the length of the rail. Note: End stops are
2.90 available for the following width conveyors:
8”, 10”, 12”, 18”, and 24”.
.90 To Order:
8” 125-0234-08
10” 125-0234-10
12” 125-0234-12
18” 125-0234-18
2.35 * 24” 125-0234-24
Example: (1) 125-0234-10
One end stop for a 10” wide conveyor
equipped with flared side rails
End Stops Note: Designed to be compatible with 1”

and 2” cleats. End stops are equipped with
a swing gate to help contain product
Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide AND Flared Side Rails
(both sold separately) Part # 125R-0282-LLL and #Z-1004-LLL
The Adjustable Hopper is used in
conjunction with the Flared Side Rail. The
hopper is made from (2) end stops,
L which are adjustable down the length of
the rail. Available for the following width
L - 4.20 MAX. conveyors: 8”, 10” 12” 18”, and 24”.
To Order:
L - 5.80 MAX. Please order a quantity of 2:
8” 125-0234-08
10” 125-0234-10
12” 125-0234-12
18” 125-0234-18
2.35 * 24” 125-0234-24
Example: (2) 125-0234-18
Two end stops for an 18” wide conveyor
equipped with flared side rails
Adjustable Hopper Note: Designed to be compatible with 1”
L = length of flared side rails and 2” cleats. End stops are equipped with
a swing gate to help contain product
Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide AND Flared Side Rails (both sold
separately) Part # 125-0282-LLL and #Z-1004-LLL *Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Mounts
Standard Mounts
.22 DIA. .34 DIA. W + 1.46 To Order:

.41 .59 frame has mounting holes every 3”.
1.15 .88
3.06 The Tee Slot mounted version
2.06 **
1.32 1.32 attaches to 1” siderails, 2” siderails,
.31 the single tee slot and the multi tee
.13 1.25
.38 .135
SLOT W + 1.09 MAX. Part No. 125R-0181-01 (Tee Slot)*
3.50 W + .57 MIN. Part No. 125R-0181-04 (Frame)*
Universal Adjustable Side Mount W + 1.71 Part No. 125R-0181-05 (For use with
125R-0181-04 pictured multi-tier stand)*
Notes:
Frame mounted brackets can only be used with 1” high or lower cleats.
T-Slot mounted brackets can only be used with 1/2” high or lower cleats.
W + 1.46
.22 DIA. .34 DIA.
To Order:
.59 directly to the conveyor frame. The
1.53
.88 frame has mounting holes every 3”.
.13 .31 4.81 5.28 ** The Tee Slot mounted version

attaches to 1” siderails, 2” siderails,
3.10 3.07
1.25 the single tee slot and the multi tee
.38 .135 W + 1.09 MAX.

Universal Raised Side Mount SLOT W + .57 MIN. Part No. 125R-0182-01 (Tee Slot)*
3.50 Part No. 125R-0182-04 (Frame)*
125R-0182-04 pictured W + 1.71

necessary hardware
Universal raised side mounts work with all cleat heights.
To Order:
.93 ** This mount uses existing through
Standard method for .63
holes on the conveyor that are
mounting to stands
located 6.06” from tail end and 8.5”
(fasteners included)
or 14.5” from drive end. This will
3/8-16
mount the conveyor to a flat surface.
.38 W + 1.00 CAP SCREW To order, use the part number below
and fill in the nominal conveyor width
W + 1.75 5/16-18 in inches for the last two digits.
Alternate method for CAP SCREW
mounting to stands .93 ** Part No. 125R-0116- *
(fasteners not included) .63 Example: 125R-0116-06*
Rod Clamp Mount Rod clamp mount for a 6” wide
conveyor

Mount cannot be used with Multi Tee or Single Tee Slotted Side Assembly necessary hardware
Mount cannot be used with cleated belts
11/32 DIA. To Order:

5/16-18 Attaches directly to the underside of
.63 SET SCREW the conveyor frame. To order use the
part number below and fill in the
.257 DIA.
2.89 ** nominal conveyor width in inches for
THRU HOLE
the last two digits.
1.25 .16 .43
.84
Part No. 125R-0011- *
W - 1.50
W - .75
Example: 125R-0011-04
W + 1.00
W + 1.50 conveyor

Bottom mount can attach conveyor to a horizontal or vertical surface. necessary hardware
This mount cannot be used with high adhesion or cleated belts.

Stands
To order:
Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches) H1 H2 WW
WW H1 - H2 H1 - H2
06 - 09 Part No. 0182R - - -
33 - 36
09 - 12 36 - 39
12 - 15 39 - 42 1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections.
15 - 18 42 - 45 *Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height.
18 - 21 45 - 48
21 - 24 48 - 51
24 - 27 51 - 54 NOTE: No additional mounts are required.
27 - 30 54 - 57
Stand Widths-WW (nominal conveyor width in inches) height range is 12 - 15 inches.
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24
Example: 0182R - 30 - 33 - 24 (Part No. includes one stand)
Angle Brace
To order:
Part No.
125R-0189-00
For use with aluminum stands only.
Angle brace can be used on a 125 Series conveyor with a minimum top of belt height
of 28”. The angle brace can replace cross ties for conveyors 5’ long and up. When
used with casters, angle braces must be used on both stands. Order (1) per stand.
Stainless Steel Tubular Stand

To order:
Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches)
WW H1 H2 WW
H1 - H2
24 - 27 Part No. 0188 - - -
27 - 30
1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections.
30 - 33 *Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height.
33 - 36
36 - 39
39 - 42 NOTE: No additional mounts are required. The mounts are
included with the stand.
42 - 45
NOTE: Conveyors 4” wide and under will have the stand
Stand Widths-WW (nominal conveyor width in inches) framework on the outside of the conveyor.
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24
Casters Swivel-In Tee Nut
To order: To order:
Part No. 125R-0122-04 Part No.
Swivel locking caster 125-0074-036 (Qty 1)
Order (2) per stand 125-0074-036-SET (Qty 4)
Casters can be added to The Swivel-In Tee Nut is ideal for
either aluminum or steel mounting brackets to an aluminum
stands. Swivel locking casters stand, and allows quick mounting
increase stand height by location changes.
5.50”. Note: Swivel-In Tee Nut is zinc plated
Casters should only be used 1/4-20 thread-in Tee Nut is
with stands that are 1/3 as provided for attaching accessories.
wide as they are tall.
NOTE:NOTE: All applications

All applications will require
will require theuser
the end endtouser to properly
properly lag stands
lag stands and ensure
and ensure stability.
stability. Because Because every application
every application and installation
and installation is different,
is different, the the
functionality
functionality and performance
and performance of the of the supports
supports dependdepend
on theon
endtheuser.
endQCuser. QC Industries
Industries can aidcan aid in determining
in determining the supports
the supports your application
your application requires.
requires.
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Drives

The equivalent load was determined in the conveyor technical data pages (pages 46 and 50). To choose a gear motor combination that works
best for the application, the next step is to convert that equivalent load into the torque required and size a drive based upon its use. The user
must know the belt speed (in feet per minute), service factor (determined below), and the duty cycle of the application. The steps below guide
the user through this process. These steps will utimately compare the torque required to move the load on the conveyor (Required Conveyor
Drive Torque) and the torque the drive train is capable of producing (Supplied Drive Train Torque).

Enter the equivalent load the drive must handle (from pages 46 or 50). Divide this number by 6.
The result equals the torque required for the application, or the required conveyor drive torque (RCDT). Enter RCDT on
Line One.

Choose the belt speed from one of the following pages (63 or 65), and write down the drive train torque (DTT)
for the selected speed. Please note that if you are choosing a top or bottom drive, you may use a timing belt.
For heavy duty drives (listed on page 65), the drive train torque is lower if using a timing belt. Enter the drive
train torque on Line Two.
3. Enter Service Factor (SF) 3.

Use Chart 60-A below based upon the hours of operation per day as well as starts and stops per hour. Enter
the result on Line Three.

Divide the drive train torque (DDT) by the service factor (SF). This result equals the supplied drive train torque
(SDTT). Enter the result on Line Four.

Compare Line 4 (the supplied drive train torque

[SDTT]) to Line 1(the required conveyor drive torque Hours of Operation per Day
[RCDT]). If the SDTT is equal to or greater than RCDT, 24 16 8 2
then you have selected the proper drive. SDTT > 2.3 2.0 1.8 1.6
RCDT. If not, then:
Service Factor
2.2 1.9 1.7 1.5 Factor

B) Choose a wider conveyor
2.0 1.7 1.5 1.3
C) Consult factory
1.9 1.6 1.4 1.2
Starts per Hour 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Example: Example:
100 / 6 = 17 (RCDT) 300 / 6 = 50.0 (RCDT)
30 FPM (From page 63 - standard duty top drive - fixed speed) 50 FPM (From page 65 - heavy duty bottom drive - fixed speed)
33 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) 87 inch lbs. of torque (DTT)
Class II (using timing belt on a top drive) Class II (using timing belt on a bottom drive)
33 / 1.5 = 22 inch lbs. (SDTT) 87 / 1.7 = 51.1 inch lbs. (SDTT)
RCDT = 17 RCDT = 50.0

SDTT = 22 SDTT = 51.1
20 7 17 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque) 51.1 7 50.0 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)

Arrangement
Step 2
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Standard Drives
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Side Drive

Step 4
Side Drive
Note:
This mounting arrangement allows Sizing Information Mounting Part Number Motor Part Number Motor Information
for the drive to be mounted on either Example: M1-S3SE-CR Example: 051-025-WD
7.20 2.50
side of the conveyor with the motor
FPM* Torque in Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Prefix Voltage Ratio Suffix HP Voltage AMP
3.59 4.35 inline with the drive pulley.
.50 Reference the drawings to the left for 4.5 88 M1- S 1 or 3 SE-CR 05 1- 120 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9
10 76 M1- S 1 or 3 SE-CR 05 1- 050 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9
Drive Location mounting package and 18 50 M1- S 1 or 3 SE-CR 05 1- 030 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9
3 1 gearmotor ordering 21 M1- S 1 or 3 05 1- 115v 1PH TENV 0.9
41 SE-CR 025 -WD 1/19
Step 1:
.78 0.9
3.59 .11 .38 immediately left shows 30 33 M1- S 1 or 3 SE-CR 05 1- 018 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV
the possible drive 43 23 M1- S 1 or 3 SE-CR 05 1- 012 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location Chart
Choose mounting
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right 1 3
Step 1
125 Series Corrosion Resistant

Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Remote Drive
Remote Drive
/ .28
O
Note:
the drive to be mounted away from
Sizing Information
FPM* Torque in Lbs. Prefix

Example: M1-R1SE-CR
Mounting Position* Suffix Prefix

Motor Part Number
Example: 051-018-WD
Voltage Ratio Suffix HP

Motor Information
Voltage AMP
arrangement
7.20 1.26
4.88 3.59
the conveyor and on either side of the
4.5
10
18
77
40
27
M1-
M1-
M1-
R
R
R
1 or 3
1 or 3
1 or 3
SE-CR
SE-CR
SE-CR
05
05
05
1-
1-
1-
120
050
030
-WD
-WD
-WD
1/19
1/19
1/19
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV
1
1
1
& location
21 05
Drive Location tables to the right for 22 M1- R 1 or 3 SE-CR 1- 025 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1
2.00
4.25 3 1 mounting package and 30 17 M1- R 1 or 3 SE-CR 05 1- 018 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1
.23 1.31 43 12 M1- R 1 or 3 SE-CR 05 1- 012 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1
3.50
immediately left shows the *Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location Chart
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right 1 3 M1-S1SE-CR (Side Drive Mounting) 051-120-WD (115v 1PH Gearmotor @ 4.5 FPM)
Top Drive Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Top Drive
7.51 Note:
Sizing Information
FPM* Torque in Lbs.

Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525-CR
Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt Suffix Prefix
Motor Part Number
Example: 051-025-WD
Voltage Ratio Suffix HP
Motor Information
Voltage AMP
Step 2:
9.50
3.59
inline with the drive pulley. Reference
dimensional information.
4.5
10
88
76
M1-
M1-
T
T
1 or 3
1 or 3
SE-
SE-
5M
5M
25
25
25
25
-CR
-CR
05
05
1-
1-
120
050
-WD
-WD
1/19
1/19
115v 1PH TENV
115v 1PH TENV

0.9
0.9
Choose speed
2.88 3.50 Drive Location Reference the tables to the 18 50 M1- T 1 or 3 SE- 5M 25 25 -CR 05 1- 030 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9
3 1 right for mounting package
21 41 M1- T 1 or 3 SE- 5M 25 25 -CR 05 1- 025 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9
and gearmotor ordering
30 33 M1- T 05 1- 018 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9
1 or 3 SE- 5M 25 25 -CR
1.75 possible drive positions.
Front View Top View 43 23 M1- T 1 or 3 SE- 5M 25 25 -CR 05 1- 012 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right 1 3 *Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location Chart
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Bottom Drive

Bottom Drive Sizing Information Mounting Part Number Motor Part Number Motor Information
Example: M1-B3SE-5M2525-CR Example: 051-012-WD
Step 3:
1.75 Note:
FPM* Torque in Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt Suffix Prefix Voltage Ratio Suffix HP Voltage AMP
.33 This mounting arrangement allows
4.5 77 M1- B 1 or 3 SE- 5M 25 25 120 05 1- 120 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1
conveyor, and with the motor inline 10 40 1
B 1 or 3 SE- 5M 25 25 050 05 1- 1/19 115v 1PH TENV
Run drive sizing

with the drive pulley. Reference the M1- 050 -WD
3.21 drawings to the left for dimensional 18 27 25 25 030 115v 1PH TENV 1
M1- B 1 or 3 SE- 5M 05 1- 030 -WD 1/19
9.50 3.50 3.59 information. Reference the
Drive Location tables to the right for 21 22 25 25 025 1
M1- B 1 or 3 SE- 5M 05 1- 025 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV
4.23 gearmotor ordering 30 17 B 1 or 3 SE- 5M 25 25 018 05 1- 115v 1PH TENV 1
.42 M1- 018 -WD 1/19
immediately left shows the 43 12 M1- B 1 or 3 SE- 5M 25 25 012 05 1- -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 1
012
7.51 possible drive positions.
Front View
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right
Top View
1 3
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM
Notes:
*See Drive Location Chart
M1-T3SE-5M2525-CR (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)
051-050-WD (115v 1PH Gearmotor@ 6.0 TO 12.0 FPM)
Page 60
1. Motors are UL approved
2. Torque values are based upon start-up torque Gearmotors include a 6’ cord
Step 3 Step 4:
(p. 60) Choose voltage
Speed Mounting Voltage requirements
Step 5
ant
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Top Drive Step 5:

Sizing Information Mounting Part Number Motor Part Number Motor Information Put together two part
Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525-CR Example: 051-025-WD
FPM* Torque in Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt Suffix Prefix Voltage Ratio Suffix HP Voltage AMP numbers, drive
4.5 88 M1- T 1 or 3 SE- 5M 25 25 -CR 05 1- 120 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.9 mounting package and
gearmotor, by
50 05 1- 030 -WD 1/19
following from left to
18 M1- T 1 or 3 SE- 5M 25 25 -CR 115v 1PH TENV 0.9
right
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location Chart
Torque Gear Reducer Horsepower

Timing Pulley Voltage Key
Combinations 1 115VAC 1 PH
3 230/460 VAC 3 PH
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Standard Duty Drives
Side Drive
Note:
7.20 2.56 side of the conveyor with the motor
3.59 4.35 inline with the drive pulley.
.50 Reference the drawings to the left for
3 1 gearmotor ordering
3.59 .64 .38 information. The box
the possible drive
1 3
Remote Drive
Note:
.28 DIA. the drive to be mounted away from
7.20 1.23 the conveyor and on either side of the
4.88 3.59 the drive pulley. Reference the
4.25 2.00
.23 1.32
1 3
Top Drive
Note:
7.51 This mounting arrangement allows
3.59 inline with the drive pulley. Reference
9.50 3.50 3.59
2.88 * dimensional information.
.45 3 1 right for mounting package
and gearmotor ordering
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53. 1 3
Bottom Drive
Note:
1.75
.33 This mounting arrangement allows
conveyor, and with the motor inline
3.21 with the drive pulley. Reference the
9.50 drawings to the left for dimensional
3.50 3.59
4.23
.42 3 1 mounting package and
gearmotor ordering
7.51
Front View Top View
1 3
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Side Drive
Example: M1-S3SE-CR Example: 051-025-WD
4.5 88 M1- S 1 or 3 SE-CR 05 1- 120 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.7
*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location Chart
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Remote Drive

Example: M1-R1SE-CR Example: 051-018-WD
4.5 88 M1- R 1 or 3 SE-CR 05 1- 120 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.7
10 69 M1- R 1 or 3 SE-CR 05 1- 050 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.7

M1-S1SE-CR (Side Drive Mounting) 051-120-WD (115v 1PH Gearmotor @ 4.5 FPM)
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Top Drive

Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525-CR Example: 051-025-WD
FPM* Torque in Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt Suffix Prefix Voltage Ratio Suffix HP Voltage AMP
4.5 88 M1- T 1 or 3 SE- 5M 25 25 -CR 05 1- 120 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.7
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Bottom Drive

Example: M1-B3SE-5M2525-CR Example: 051-012-WD
FPM* Torque in Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt Suffix Prefix Voltage Ratio Suffix HP Voltage AMP
4.5 88 M1- B 1 or 3 SE- 5M 25 25 -CR 05 1- 120 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.7
10 69 M1- B 1 or 3 SE- 5M 25 25 -CR 05 1- 050 -WD 1/19 115v 1PH TENV 0.7
M1-T3SE-5M2525-CR (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt) 051-050-WD (115v 1PH Gearmotor@ 6.0 TO 12.0 FPM)
Notes:
1. Motors are UL, CSA and CE approved

2. Torque values are based upon start-up torque Gearmotors include a 6’ cord
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Heavy Duty Drives
Side Drive
Note:
4.14 B DIA.
B DIA. side of the conveyor with the motor
.48 ** perpendicular with the drive pulley.
A Reference the drawings to the left for
1.77 ** the tables to the right for
1.34
.87
3.89 the possible drive
Top View positions.
Front View
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see Motor Information table at the bottom of the page. 1-J 3-G
Remote Drive
Note:
2.75 B DIA. the drive to be mounted away from
B DIA. the conveyor and on either side of the
conveyor, with the motor
perpendicular with the drive pulley.
.44 DIA. Reference the drawings to the left for
2.50 ** dimensional information.
.85 5.72 and gearmotor ordering
3.75 2.88 immediately left shows the
Top View possible drive positions.
Front View
Note: 56 frame gearmotors extend below gearbox *For “A” and “B” dimensions, see Motor Information table at the bottom of the page. 1-G 3-J
mounting plate and may require shimming
Top Drive
1.86 B DIA. Note:
B DIA. the conveyor belt, on either side of
A perpendicular with the drive pulley.
9.50 5.68 ** dimensional information.
3.50 3-G 1-J right for mounting package
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see Motor Information table at the bottom of the page. 1-J 3-G
Bottom Drive
1.75 .33 ** Note:
B DIA. conveyor belt, on either side of the
conveyor, and with the motor
A perpendicular with the drive pulley.
9.50 5.30 Reference the drawings to the left for
dimensional information.
1.86 B DIA. immediately left shows the
.37 possible drive positions.
Front View Top View
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see Motor Information table at the bottom of the page. 1-G 3-J
Motor Dimension Chart

The motor can be rotated in 90O increments to
achieve alternate orientations when attaching it to 501 503 50V 503 (ID)
the gearbox. This allows the user flexibility when A 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08
deciding where the motor capacitor and gearbox B 6.15 6.19 4.98 7.23
will be located.

Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - Side Drive
Example: M1-S1J0-CR Example: 501 - 50J-WD Voltage
Gearbox 115/230 230/460 DC
FPM* Torque in Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Prefix Voltage Ratio Hand Suffix HP Amp Amp Amp Face
12 120 M1- S 1J or 3G 0-CR 50 1,3,V, D- 50 G or J -WD 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 5 56C
15 128 M1- S 1J or 3G 0-CR 50 1,3,V ,D- 40 G or J -WD 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 5 56C
60 107 M1- S 1J or 3G 0-CR 50 1,3,V,D- 10 G or J -WD 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 5 56C
Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed -Remote Drive
Example: M1-S1J0-CR Example: 501 - 50J-WD Voltage
Gearbox 115/230 230/460 DC
FPM* Torque in Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Prefix Voltage Ratio Hand Suffix HP Amp Amp Amp Face
12 120 M1- R 1G or 3J 0-CR 50 1,3,V, D- 50 G or J -WD 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 5 56C
Voltage Key
1 115 VAC 1 PH For optional AC controls, see p. 66
Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - Top or Bottom Drive
Example: M1-B3J0-5M2525-CR Example: 503-05J-WD Voltage
Torque (DTT) Suffix Gearbox 115/230 230/460 DC

FPM* Prefix Mounting Position* Belt GMtr. Sprkt Conv SprktSuffix Prefix Voltage Ratio Hand Suffix HP
Inch Lbs. Amp Amp Amp Face
M1- T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 0- 5M 50 1,3,V, D- 50 G or J -WD
12 95 or 3G
25 25 -CR 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 5 56C
1J, 1G, 3J 0-
15 95 M1- T or B
or 3G
5M 25 25 -CR 50 1,3,V, D- 40 G or J -WD 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 5 56C
1J, 1G, 3J 0-
20 98 M1- T or B or 3G 5M 25 25 -CR 50 1,3,V, D- 30 G or J -WD 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 5 56C
1J, 1G, 3J 0-
30 93 M1- T or B or 3G 5M 25 25 -CR 50 1,3,V, D- 20 G or J -WD 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 5 56C
1J, 1G, 3J
40 89 M1- T or B or 3G
0- 5M 25 25 -CR 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J -WD 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 5 56C
1J, 1G, 3J
50 87 M1- T or B or 3G
0- 5M 30 25 -CR 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J -WD 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 5 56C
1J, 1G, 3J
60 84 M1- T or B or 3G 0- 5M 25 25 CR 50 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J -WD 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 5 56C
1J, 1G, 3J
75 89 M1- T or B or 3G 0- 5M 30 25 -CR 50 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J -WD 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 5 56C
1J, 1G, 3J
1J, 1G, 3J
1J, 1G, 3J
1J, 1G, 3J
M1- T or B 1J, 1G, 3J

200 51 or 3G 0- 5M 40 25 -CR 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J -WD 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 5 56C
225 M1- T or B 1J, 1G, 3J

46 or 3G
0- 5M 44 25 -CR 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J -WD 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 5 56C

Notes: M1-T1J0-5M4025-CR (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt) 501-10J-WD (115V 1Ph Gearmotor@100 FPM)

2. Torque values are based upon running torque See Drive Accessories (page 66) for
3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2HP. Add an ID to the end of the part number (230 VAC 3 PH motors only) optional controllers
4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Drive Accessories
Drive Accessories

.188
30:1 speed range
7.20 6.35 UL/ULc/CE
NEMA 4X Enclosure
.85
To Order:
2.12 2 X .75 NPT Part Number:
56 125-0054-38 NEMA 4X DC Control

environment.
Washdown DC Control 2.20 1.20

.188
UL/ULc
7.20 6.35 NEMA 4X Enclosure
.85
Run/Stop switch
To Order:
2.12 2 X .75 NPT Part Number:
56 125-0054-37 NEMA 4X AC Control

2.20 1.20 environment.
Washdown AC Control
Drive Shaft Extensions and Couplings
2.50
A LE
NG
TH
1/2 HEX
7/ 8 1/2
1 1/ 4
1.62
Single Piece Flex Coupling B Drive Extension Shafts
125R-0009-03 couplings pictured
Length Part No.
**Torque Rating 23 in. 125R-0005-23

Part Number A B The Drive Extension Shaft can be
(Inch Lbs.)
The Single Piece Flex Coupling is 35 in. 125R-0005-35
used to gang drive multiple
used to couple the remote mounted 125R-0009-02 .5 in. dia. .5 in. dia. 78 conveyors and/or for power take-off 47 in. 125R-0005-47
motor with the conveyor drive shaft. of remote drives.
This coupling can also be used to 59 in. 125R-0005-59
125R-0009-03 .5 in. dia. .5 hex 78
couple between gang driven
71 in. 125R-0005-71
conveyors.
125R-0009-08* .5 in. dia. .472 dia. 78 83 in. 125R-0005-83
95 in. 125R-0005-95
*For use with corrosion resistant standard duty drives only
**Value based on non-reversing applications with an angular
offset of up to 5O.
Automation Accessories
Conveyor Width Part No. Conveyor Width Part No.

2 in. 125R-0230-02 2 in. 125-0220-02
3 in. 125R-0230-03 3 in. 125-0220-03
4 in. 125R-0230-04 4 in. 125-0220-04
6 in. 125R-0230-06 6 in. 125-0220-06
8 in. 125R-0230-08 8 in. 125-0220-08
10 in. 125R-0230-10 10 in. 125-0220-10
12 in. 125R-0230-12 12 in. 125-0220-12
18 in. 125R-0230-18 18 in. 125-0220-18
24 in. 125R-0230-24 24 in. 125-0220-24
Note 1: Transfer plates are not intended Note:

for use with high friction or cleated belts. Transfer plates are not intended for use
with high friction or cleated belts.
Note 2: Discharge conveyor must be
pushing.
Note 3: Customer to drill screw holes to

mount plate.
Pivot Mount Set
Note:
The pivot mount attaches to the tail

end of the conveyor and enables a
pivot point from which other devices
can lift the conveyor.
Includes left and right hand mount
To Order:
Part No. 125R-0172-00
To Order:
Note:
1. Select an adjustable stop for 1”
sides, 2” sides, or single tee slot The adjustable diverter comes with a
(See pages 54 & 56) 5’ piece of UHMW rail and (2)
mounting assemblies that the user
2. Using the chart below, fill in the can utilize to help orient the product
part number using the nominal width around a 90O transfer.
of the conveyor for the last two digits
of the part number
Part No.
1” Sides 125R-0232-WW
2” Sides 125R-0234-WW
Single Tee Slot 125R-0233-WW
Example: 125R-0232-04
1” aluminum side rails with wear strip Part No. 125R-0250-000
125 Z Series Z Conveyors
Specifications
• Multiple cleat heights available
Overview Dimensions
.42 .75 6.13
W - .10 =
W + 2.33
BELT WIDTH
Note: As in all .50 DIA. 1.00 SHAFT

1/8 SQ. KEY LENGTH
specifications will C
change with .88
technology updates. B
Please contact ANGLE°
factory or see
1.89 ANGLE°
for the most up-to-
date drawings.
W + .31 = .82
FRAME WIDTH
A
Features & Benefits
Conveyor
areas
• Fixed angles ranging from 30O to 90O minimize the number of required components, reducing
costs as well as providing an industry best load carrying capacity
equipment
• Corrugated sides
available with Z Track
1 inch cleats
• Multiple cleat sizes and styles available • Patent-pending Z TrackTM is a unique design of the angle
See page 81 Step 5 for options idler assembly that offers
users a way to gain control
over belt tracking at the
angles of incline or decline
• Z TrackTM adjusts rapidly for
belt installation and
tracking adjustments at the
and locks in the tracking setting to ensure long-term
performance
• Z TrackTM components are precision manufactured and
produced as a pressed, sealed-for-life assembly that is
well-guarded to avoid dangerous pinch points at the

• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail • Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the
assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia
• Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to
• Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped
to promote excellent belt tracking and is with superior needle bearings with seals that
equipped with superior needle bearings are filled with high performance grease
with seals that are filled with high
performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive
assembly provide axial float, which allows the
assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions
natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load
conditions • Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for
lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings time during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions to
providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking
idler end of the conveyor that retain settings, even during belt removal
• Drive pulley is available in solid output design and dual output design
125 Z Series L Conveyors
Specifications
Overview Dimensions
.42 .75
W - .10 =
BELT WIDTH W + 2.33
.50 DIA. 1.00 SHAFT

1/8 SQ. KEY LENGTH
Note: As in all
.88
specifications will 6.13
change with
B
technology updates.
Please contact
factory or see
ANGLE°
www.qcindustries.com 1.89
for the most up-to-
date drawings.
W + .31 = .82
FRAME WIDTH A
Features
Features & Benefits
Conveyor
areas
1 inch cleats
See page 81 Step 5 for options idler assembly that offers users
a way to gain control over
belt tracking at the angles of
incline or decline
belt installation and tracking
adjustments at the angles of
incline or decline and locks in
the tracking setting to ensure long-term performance

• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail • Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass
assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia
lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings down time during lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal
providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
125 Z Series R Conveyors
Specifications
Overview Dimensions
.42 .76 6.13
W - .10 =
BELT WIDTH W + 2.33
.50 DIA. 1.00 SHAFT

Note: As in all 1/8 SQ. KEY LENGTH
A
specifications will
change with .88
technology updates. B
Please contact
factory or see ANGLE°
for the most up-to-
date drawings.
W + .31 =
FRAME WIDTH 1.89
Features
Features &Features
Benefits
Conveyor
areas
• High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are
available in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to
customer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt
1 inch cleats
performance

equipped with superior needle bearings with are filled with high performance grease
seals that are filled with high performance
grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive
• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt
end of the conveyor tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
125 Z Series U Special Conveyors
Specifications
Overview Dimensions
.42
W - .10 =
BELT WIDTH W + 2.33
.75 .50 DIA.

Note: As in all 1/8 SQ. KEY 1.00 SHAFT
LENGTH
industries, technical 6.13
specifications will .88
change with 1.89 .82
technology updates. A C
Please contact
factory or see
for the most up-to- ANGLE° ANGLE°
date drawings.
W + .31 =
FRAME WIDTH B
Features & Benefits
Conveyor
areas
1 inch cleats
• Multiple cleat sizes and styles available • Patent-pending Z TrackTM is a unique design of the
See page 81 Step 5 for options angle idler assembly that
offers users a way to gain
control over belt tracking
at the angles of incline or
decline
angles of incline or decline and locks in the tracking
setting to ensure long-term performance

125 Z Series N Special Conveyors
Specifications
Overview Dimensions
.42 .75
W - .10 BELT W + 2.33
.50 DIA. 1.00 SHAFT

Note: As in all 1/8 SQ. KEY LENGTH
industries, technical B
specifications will
change with
technology updates. ANGLE° ANGLE°
1.89
Please contact 6.13
factory or see
.82 A C
for the most up-to-
date drawings. .88
W + .31 =
FRAME WIDTH
Features & Benefits
Conveyor
areas
• High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are
available in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to
customer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt
1 inch cleats
performance

to promote excellent belt tracking and is with superior needle bearings with seals
equipped with superior needle bearings that are filled with high performance grease
QC Industries 513.753.6000
125 Z Series Conveyors
Pages 78 through 81 should be used to size, select, and compile
Selecting the Frame Arrangement a part number. Please use the steps below to begin the process
Z L R U N
See steps below See steps below See steps below Consult Factory Consult Factory
Example
1b
Choose an infeed height 1a 1a 12”
1a Choose an infeed length (if Z or L) 1b 1b 24”

in 6” increments
2b 48”
Choose a discharge height 2a 2a
2a 18”
Choose a discharge length (if Z or R) 2b 2b
in 6” increments
Determine rise (the difference between

3 the discharge and infeed heights) 48”
3 -12” 3 36”
in inches
36”
2a - 1a
Select the angle and enter the constant

from the table below
4 4 45O 4 .7
Angle 30O 45O 60O 75O 90O
Constant (K) .5 .7 .87 .97 1
Determine the last frame section length (36 / .7) + 2 = 53.4

(Round up to
(Rise/K) + 2 5 a 6” increment)
54”
Choose a frame length in 6” increments 5
Recalculate discharge height ((54 - 2) * .7) + 12 = 48.4

((Step 5 - 2) * K) + 1a
2a
If new height is not acceptable, choose a different length
2a (Revised)
(in 6” increments) for the center frame section and 48.4”
2a
recalculate. If the center frame section is changed, please
check the discharge length in step 2b for proper distance.
Use the values from 1b, 2b, and 5 in the length section of the conveyor part number. See page 80.
To Determine the Conveyor Floor Length Run*

*This section is provided to allow the user to determine the overall floor space. It is not necessary information for placing an order.
c
Key Example for Z
a = a frame length
1) Solve for X X= b2 - y2
1) 542 - 362 = 40.25
b
b = b frame length
c = c frame length y
2) Solve for Q 2) 24
a +40.25
y = rise For a Z: Q = (A + X + C) - 6
A° +18
x = run x
For an L: Q = (A + X) - 4 - 6
AO = angle
Q = overall length Q
For an R: Q = (B + X) -4 =76.25
Technical Data
Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 79-A

150
All applications require certain performance characteristics from the conveyor.
QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses these 135
125 125 125 125 125
parameters into a common factor called Equivalent Load. For instance, a 120
conveyor application that is carrying a 5 lb. load up an incline is required to
105
move a load equivalent to more than merely the 5 lbs. of product placed upon
the belt. 90
75 67 67 67 67 67
Please follow the 3 steps below to determine the Equivalent Load for Lbs.
60
your application. These results will then be used to properly size the torque
requirement for the gearmotor arrangement. (pages 86-89). 45
30
15
0
18 8 24 10
Belt Width
Enter the load (in pounds) that the conveyor must carry on Line 1. Note: See page 81
Use Figure 79-A to cross-reference the load calculation with the conveyor’s Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.
load carrying capacity; drive pulling or drive pushing.
Example: Product is a box weighing 2 lbs. There will be 25 boxes on the

conveyor at any one time. 2 lbx x 25 = 50 lb. load. Conveyor width is 12
inches, which is capable of carrying 125 lbs. pulling. (Ref. Figure 79-A) Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 79-B
3.4
3.5
3.1
2.5 2.3
These applications utilize an incline or decline. Choose a factor from
Figure 79-B based upon the angle of incline/decline, then multiply that 2.0
factor by the total nominal load from Line 1 above. Enter the result on 1.6
Line 2. 1.5
Example: 50 lb. (nominal load) x 2.3 (45O factor) = 115 lb. load equivalent 1.0
0.5
0.0
Angle 30 45 60 75 90
3. Frictional Load 3. Factor 1.6 2.3 2.8 3.1 3.4
All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be factored into the
load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in, either add
4 to the conveyor’s width, then multiply by 6, or simply choose the value
from Figure 79-C. Enter the result on Line 3.
Example: 4 + 12 (Conv Width) x 6 = 96 lb. load equivalent (Ref. Fig. 79-C)
200
168
150
132
Equivalent Load SUM (1 thru 3) lbs.
Equivalent Load
100 96
72 84
Write down the equivalent load on the application data sheet (found in the
back of the catalog). The equivalent load is needed to properly size a
gearmotor for the conveyor. (Ref. Gearmotors pages 86-89) 50
Example: 0
50 lbs. (Step 1)
Conveyor Width 8 10 12 18 24
+115 lbs (Step 2)
+ 96 lbs (Step 3) Frictional Load 72 84 96 132 168
261 lbs Equivalent Load
Next, proceed to the next page to construct the belt part number.
125 Z Series Z Conveyors
How to Order
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6
A B C
Drive Location
Construction
Section Section Section
Frame Style
Drive Pulley
Drive Type
# of Cleats
# of Cleats
# of Cleats
Tail Pulley
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
Series
Frame
Angle
Width
Width
Belt
Belt
Belt
1 E S - - -
Step 1
B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige) Z = Z Frames

1 = 125 E = End Drive S = Standard R = R Frames
L = L Frames
Custom colors available - contact factory
For U & N frame styles, contact factory
Step 2
A B
Note: The nominal width of

the conveyor is not usable
Widths belt space. Please refer to
Cleat width when using side rails Cleat width when using corrugated sidewall
the drawings and table to
Order determine a width for your
Width Code A- Maximum Part Width B - Maximum Part Width application. Option A shows
8” 08 4.20” 3.56” a cleated belt with
adjustable guide rails (see
10” 10 6.20” 5.56” page 82) while option B
shows a cleated belt with
12” 12 8.20” 7.56”
corrugated sidewall (see
18” 18 12.92” 12.24” page 81)
24” 24 18.92” 18.24”
Step 3
Lengths
Frame Lengths 18” 24” 30” 36” 42” 48” 54” 60” 66” 72” 78” 84” 90” 96” 102” 108” 114” 120” 126” 132”
for a, b, and c
Order Code 018 024 030 036 042 048 054 060 066 072 078 084 090 096 102 108 114 120 126 132
Angle 18”
Example Length:
Angle for AO 30O 45O 60O 75O 90O 024C054018
Order Code B C D E F b
45O 54” y
24”
°
x
Q
Note: Use the values

determined on page 78.
a AO b c a AO b a AO b Note: Total frame sections

should not exceed 20’.
a + b + c <=20’
How to Order (continued)
Step 4

B
rd rd
da Cap 1/2” Dia*
S da
A an an Standard Q
n
io 42
1/2” Dia* 1/2” Dia* pt g. Detectable D
D D Oep
Dual Output se
C
Step 5
Choose three digit belt ordering code 1” High Corrugated

2” High Sidewall with
1/2” High Cleat 3/4” High Cleat 1” High Cleat 2” High Cleat 3” High Cleat Angled Cleat 1” High Cleat
20˚
.20 .20 .20
.20 1"
.20
3.00
2.00
.13
.50 .75 2.00
1.00
ZAE ZAF ZAG ZAI ZAK ZAJ ZAH*

Example: ZAG = 1” Cleat Height *Max. incline/decline angle for corrugated sidewall 60O
Step 6
As standard, we assemble the
Determine the Number of Cleats conveyor, track the pre-
tensioned belt and quality check
1) Determine endless belt length (Solve for N) every conveyor before we ship
((a + b + c) x 2) - 8 = N to the customer. Certain
conveyor lengths and
Z 2) Determine number of cleats configurations will ship
N/ Desired spacing unassembled. Accessories
such as Drives, Stands, Mounts,
and Guides are packaged
Example: 160/6= 27
separately and are shipped
unassembled with the conveyor
to prevent damage during
1) Determine endless belt length (Solve for N) shipment. Complete assembly
((a + b) x 2) - 4 = N can be provided upon request;
L please contact our factory for
2) Determine number of cleats details.
N/Desired spacing
1) Determine endless belt length (Solve for N)

((a + b) x 2) - 4 = N
R
2) Determine number of cleats
N/ Desired spacing
Example:
a = 24”, b = 36”, c = 24” Cleat spacing desired = 6”
Order Code Example: ZAG027
Overall belt length = (24 + 36 + 24) x 2 = 168 - 8 = 160
Total # of cleats is 160/6 = 27 (rounded to nearest odd number)
Example: 1ESBZ12-024C054018-BSQ-ZAG031
125 Z Series conveyor with powder coated frame, “Z” style, 12” wide with 24” horizontal section inclining at 45O for
54”, changing to a horizontal section for 18”. Drive is located in position “B” using a standard drive pulley and
standard tail pulley. Belt is a standard urethane belt with (31) 1” high cleats on approximately 6” cleat-to-cleat centers.
125 Z Series Adjustable Guide Rails
W - 3.27*
W - 4.55** The Adjustable Side Rails are used when a guide is
required to run the length of the conveyor. Adjustable guide
rails are available in 1”, 2”, and 3” heights. The 2” and 3”
2.50 MAX. guide may be used in conjunction with the Flared Sides,
1.13 MIN.
End Stop and Hopper (sold separately - reference page
83).
To Order:
W + 2.81
2-Axis Adjustable Guides 1” Z-0281-ZA aaa bbb ccc
W + 5.95 Z 2” Z-0282-ZA aaa bbb ccc
1” H Guide Assembly * For 8” - 12” conveyors 3” Z-0283-ZA aaa bbb ccc
For use with cleated belting without Part# Z-0281- (see table at right) ** For 18” - 24” conveyors
corrugated sidewall
W - 3.42*
W - 4.70** 1” Z-0281-LA aaa bbb
2” Z-0282-LA aaa bbb
L 3” Z-0283-LA aaa bbb
3.25 MAX.
1.99 MIN.
4.34
1” Z-0281-RA aaa bbb

R 2” Z-0282-RA aaa bbb
3” Z-0283-RA aaa bbb
W + 2.81
W + 5.95
2” H Guide Assembly * For 8” - 12” conveyors Example: Z-0281-ZB0360720018
Part# Z-0282- (see table at right) ** For 18” - 24” conveyors
1” high guide assembly for a 30O Z style conveyor
that has a 36” infeed, 72” rise, and 18” discharge
W - 3.55*
W - 4.83**
Part Number Key
5.25 MAX.
A = Angle a,b,c = Frame Sections
3.00 MIN.
O
B = 30 aaa = a Section Length
4.34 C = 45O bbb = b Section Length
D = 60O ccc = c Section Length*
E = 75O
F = 90O *Not necessary for R or L
conveyors
W + 2.81
W + 5.95
3” H Guide Assembly * For 8” - 12” conveyors
Part# Z-0283- (see table at right) ** For 18” - 24” conveyors
W - 4.43 * When the end user requires a conveyor with corrugated

sidewall belting and a flared side, end chute or hopper, this
guide rail is needed. It provides a 2” high side rail and the
W - 5.71 **
necessary mounting to support the flared sides, end chutes
and hopper (sold separately - reference page 83). The
guiderail incorporates a 2-axis adjustment that allows raising
the side rail above the corrugated sidewall, providing a
precise “drop zone” into the cleat pocket.
To Order:
Part Number:
W + .31
125-0282-LLL-S* 2” high 2-Axis Adjustable Guide Rail
Infeed Guide
W + 4.31 *The guide rail length should equal the length of the flared side rail,
which is ordered separately (reference page 83). The guide rail is only
For use with corrugated sidewall * For 8” - 12” conveyors required on the infeed frame a-section (reference conveyor ordering -
page 80).
belting ** For 18” - 24” conveyors
Flared Side Rails & Hoppers
applications that require a “drop zone”
wider than the width of the conveyor.
W + 2.38 The flared side rails attach to the 2-Axis
W + 1.10* L Adjustable Guides or the Infeed Guide
45° W - 3.42 rails, sold separately and shown on
W - 4.70 * page 82.
4.98
To Order:
2.00 MAX Z-1004-012 12” length

CLEAT HEIGHT *18” and 24” wide conveyors only
Z-1004-018 18” length
W + .31 Z-1004-024 24” length
Z-1004-030 30” length
W + 1.38 Z-1004-036 36” length
W + .10* L
Z-1004-042 42” length
45°
W - 4.44 Z-1004-048 48” length
Flared Side Rails* W - 5.72*
Example:
5.94
(1) Z-1004-024
A set of 24” long flared side rails
*Flared Sides must be mounted to the
2-Axis Adjustable Guides sold
separately on pg. 82. 1.00 MAX CLEAT Note: Flared sides must be at least 6” shorter
than the frame section length
& C.S.W. HEIGHT
W + .31
*18” and 24” wide conveyors only
W + 3.75 2.90
W + 2.47 * 20° End Stops are used in conjunction with the
Flared Side Rails. Stops are adjustable
down the length of the Flared Rail and
include a UHMW flap to help prevent parts
5.06 from dropping off the end of the conveyor.
To Order:
W - 3.50
W - 4.78 * *18” and 24” Width Part No. Part No.*
wide conveyors 8” Z-0234-08 Z-0234-CSW-08
W + .31 10” Z-0234-10 Z-0234-CSW-10
only
12” Z-0234-12 Z-0234-CSW-12
W + 2.75 3.10
18” Z-0234-18 Z-0234-CSW-18
W + 1.47* 20° 24” Z-0234-24 Z-0234-CSW-24
End Stops* *Note: Use the part number that contains “CSW”
when your conveyor utilizes a Corrugated Sidewall
belt material. (Belt ordering code: ZAH)
6.03
* End Stops must be mounted to flared
sides as shown above. Flared sides sold Example:
separately. Z-0234-12
W - 4.50 *18” and 24” One end stop for a conveyor without a
W - 5.78* wide conveyors corrugated sidewall belt
W + .31 only
L Hopper assemblies are created by

ordering (2) End Stops. The stops can
2.90 2.90
be easily placed anywhere along the
length of the flared rails to create a
hopper of varying size.
To Order:
Order a quantity of (2) to make a hopper
Width Part No. Part No.*

8” Z-0234-08 Z-0234-CSW-08
10” Z-0234-10 Z-0234-CSW-10
L 12” Z-0234-12 Z-0234-CSW-12
3.10 3.10 18” Z-0234-18 Z-0234-CSW-18
24” Z-0234-24 Z-0234-CSW-24
*Note: Use the part number that contains “CSW”
Adjustable Hopper* when your conveyor utilizes a Corrugated
Sidewall belt material.
* Hopper must be mounted to flared sides

Example:
as shown above. Flared sides sold Z-0234-12 (Quantity: 2)
separately. Two end stops, which create a hopper for
a conveyor without a corrugated sidewall
belt
125 Z Series Stands
Aluminum Stand (for infeed heights greater than 9”)
Discharge
Infeed
Infeed Stand With Feet

Cross Tie Discharge Stand
To Order:
Based upon the calculations performed on page 78, choose your infeed and discharge stands using the tables below:
Infeed Stand Legend Discharge Stand Legend
Prefix Type* Low TOB** High TOB** Width*** Prefix Type* Low TOB** High TOB** Width***
2234 F or C- 9- 12- WW 2233 F or C- 24- 27- WW
2234 F or C- 12- 15- WW 2233 F or C- 27- 30- WW
2233 F or C- 15- 18- WW 2233 F or C- 30- 33- WW
2233 F or C- 18- 21- WW 2233 F or C- 33- 36- WW
2233 F or C- 21- 24- WW 2233 F or C- 36- 39- WW
2233 F or C- 24- 27- WW 2233 F or C- 39- 42- WW
2233 F or C- 27- 30- WW 2233 F or C- 42- 45- WW
2233 F or C- 30- 33- WW 2233 F or C- 45- 48- WW
2233 F or C- 33- 36- WW 2233 F or C- 48- 51- WW
2233 F or C- 36- 39- WW 2233 F or C- 51- 54- WW
*Feet or Caster **TOB = Top of Belt ***Nominal Conveyor Width 2233 F or C- WW
54- 57-
Example: 2234F-12-15-10 *Feet or Caster **TOB = Top of Belt **Nominal Conveyor Width
Aluminum stand with feet for 10” wide conveyor with infeed of 12” to 15”
Note: Example: 2233C-30-33-12

Infeed stand legs with prefix 2234 extend beyond the Aluminum stand with caster for 12” wide conveyor with discharge of 30” to 33”
conveyor framework
Aluminum Cross Ties
Aluminum cross ties are used when infeed height is

To order: above 18”. For heights below 18”, use the Z cross
brace (see page 85).
Cross Ties - Available Lengths
Inches LLL Part No. LLL
24” 024 125 - 0235 -
36” 036
48” 048 Enter length of cross ties needed into the “LLL” section
60” 060 above. A quantity of one includes (2) cross ties.
120” 120
144” 144
Example: 125-0235-024
Aluminum Stand (for infeed heights 9” or less)
Discharge
Infeed
Infeed Stand With Caster

Z Cross Brace Discharge Stand
To Order:
Based upon the calculations performed on page 78, choose your infeed and discharge stands using the tables below:
Infeed Stand Legend Discharge Stand Legend
Prefix Type* Low TOB** High TOB** Prefix Type* Low TOB** High TOB** Width***
2235 F or C- 3- 6 2233 F or C- 15- 18- WW
2235 F or C- 6- 9 2233 F or C- 18- 21- WW
*Feet or Caster **TOB = Top of Belt F or C- WW
2233 21- 24-
2233 F or C- 24- 27- WW
Example: 2235F-3-6 F or C- WW
2233 27- 30-
Aluminum stand with feet for any conveyor with infeed of
3” to 6” 2233 F or C- 30- 33- WW
2233 F or C- 33- 36- WW
2233 F or C- 36- 39- WW
Note: *Feet or Caster **TOB = Top of Belt ***Nominal Conveyor Width
Infeed stand legs extend beyond the conveyor framework
Example: 2233C-36-39-12
Aluminum stand with caster for 12” wide conveyor with discharge of 36”
to 39”
Z Cross Brace
Z Cross Braces are used when the conveyor’s infeed height is

below 18”. When it is above 18”, use Aluminum Cross Tie (see
page 84).
Y
Specifications:
1) Z and R style conveyors: Y<= 36” (ref. drawing)
Use the 18” Z Cross Brace
Y > 36 and <= 54” (ref. drawing)
Use the 36” Z Cross Brace
2) L style conveyors (all): Use the 18” Z Cross Brace
L To Order:
Part Number:
Z-0235-018 18” Z Cross Brace
Z-0235-035 36” Z Cross Brace
125 Z Series Drives

The equivalent load was determined in the conveyor technical data page (page 79). To choose a gear motor combination that works best for the
application, the next step is to convert that equivalent load into the torque required and size a drive based upon its use. The user must know the
belt speed (in feet per minute), service factor (determined below), and the duty cycle of the application. The steps below guide the user through
this process. These steps will utimately compare the torque required to move the load on the conveyor (Required Conveyor Drive Torque) and
the torque the drive train is capable of producing (Supplied Drive Train Torque).

Enter the equivalent load the drive must handle (from page 79). Divide this number by 6. The
result equals the torque required for the application, or the required conveyor drive torque (RCDT). Enter RCDT on Line One.

Choose the belt speed from page 89, and write down the drive train torque (DTT) for the selected speed. Please
note that if you are choosing a top or bottom drive, you may use either a timing belt or a chain. The drive train
torque is lower if using a timing belt. Enter the drive train torque on Line Two.
3. Select Service Class and Enter Service Factor (SF) Service Class (I or II) 3.
Select a service class: Class I - Moderate loads with chain and sprocket or direct drive
Class II - Moderate loads with belt and pulley
Now select the service factor (SF) from Chart 86-A below based upon hours of operation per day and number of
starts and stops per hour. Enter the result on Line Three.


Compare Line 4 (the supplied drive train torque Hours of Operation per Day
24 16 8 2
[SDTT]) to Line 1 (the required conveyor drive torque
[RCDT]). If the SDTT is equal to or greater than RCDT, 2.3 2.0 1.8 1.6
then you have selected the proper drive. SDTT 7
RCDT. If not, then:
2.2 1.9 1.7 1.5 Class II
2.1 1.8 1.6 1.4
Service Factor
B) Choose a wider conveyor Class I

C) Consult factory 1.9 1.6 1.4 1.2
1.8 1.5 1.3 1.1
1.7 1.4 1.2 1.0
Proceed to the next page for instructions on how to Starts and Stops per Hour 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Example:
Equivalent load = 300 (per conveyor technical data page)

300 / 6 = 50.0 (RCDT)
50 FPM (From page 89 - heavy duty bottom drive - fixed speed)
87 inch lbs. of torque (DTT)
Class II (using timing belt on a bottom drive)
16 hours per day with (10) starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.7)
87 / 1.7 = 51.1 inch lbs. (SDTT)
RCDT = 50.8
SDTT = 51.1
51.1 7 50.0 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)

Arrangement
125 Z Series Heavy Duty Drives

Step 3 Step 5 Step 1:
Heavy Duty Electric Choose mounting
Side Drive
B DIA.* Note:
Side Drive
Sizing Information Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-S1J0
Motor Part Number
Example: 161 - 50J
Motor Information
Voltage
arrangement
4.14 This arrangement allows for the
B DIA. *
.48
drive to be mounted on either side
of the conveyor with the motor
FPM*
12
Torque (DTT)
Inch Lbs.
120
Prefix
M1-
Mounting
S
Position*
1J or 3G
Suffix
0
Prefix
16
Voltage Ratio
1,3,V,D- 50
Gearbox
Hand
G or J
HP
115/230 230/460
Amp
1/6 3.6/1.9
Amp
1.3/6
DC
Amp
1.7
Face
42C
& location
A* Reference the drawings to the left for 15 128 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 16 1,3,V,D- 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/6 1.7 42C
1.77 40 G or J
the tables to the right for 20 132 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 16 1,3,V,D- 30 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/6 1.7 42C
Drive Location mounting package and 30 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 25 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/6 2.5 42C
130 1,3,V,D- 20 G or J
40 128 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 25 1,3,V,D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/6 2.5 42C
.87 immediately left shows 60 107 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 33 1,3,V,D- 10 G or J 1/3 7.2/3.6 1.6/8 3.5 42C
3.89 the possible drive
120 82 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 50 1,3,V,D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right 1-J 3-G
Remote Drive
Step 1 Remote Drive

Note:
Sizing Information
FPM*
Torque (DTT)
Prefix
Example: M1-R1G0
Mounting Position* Suffix Prefix

Motor Part Number
Example: 251-20G
Voltage Ratio
Gearbox
Hand HP
Motor Information
Amp
Voltage
115/230 230/460
Amp
DC
Amp Face Step 2:
Inch Lbs.
12 120 M1- R 1G or 3J 0 16 1,3,V,D- 50 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/6 1.7 42C
B DIA. *
A*
B DIA. *
.44 DIA.
conveyor and on either side of the
conveyor, with the motor
15
20
128
132
M1-
M1-
R
R
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
0
0
16
16
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
40
30
G or J
G or J
1/6
1/6
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9
1.3/6
1.3/6
1.7
1.7
42C
42C
If top or bottom drive
Reference the drawings to the left for 30 130 M1- R 1G or 3J 0 25 1,3,V,D- 20 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/6 2.5 42C
2.75 1.74
.50 DIA. dimensional information.
40
60
128
107
M1-
M1-
R
R
1G or 3J
1G or 3J
0
0
25
33
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
15
10
G or J
G or J
1/4
1/3
4.6/2.6
7.2/3.6
1.3/6
11.6/8
2.5
3.5
42C
42C
mounting arrangement,
2.88 and gearmotor ordering M1- R 1G or 3J 0 50 1,3,V,D- 05
choose timing belt or

3.75 1.12 120 82 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
2.88 immediately left shows the *Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location Chart

*42 frame motors only *For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right 1-G 3-J M1-S3G0 (Side Drive Mounting) 253-15J (230/460v 3PH Gearmotor@40 FPM) 1 115 VAC 1 PH
3 230/460 VAC 3 PH
For optional AC controls, see p. 90
For optional AC controls, see p. 90
See controller on p. 90
chain drive
Top Drive
Note:
Top or Bottom Drive
Fixed or Variable Speed Note: Each speed has two
B DIA.* Mounting Part Number Motor Information
1.86 B DIA. *
Sizing Information
FPM*
Torque (DTT)
Example: M1-B3J0-CH1410
Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr. Sprkt Conv Sprkt
Motor Part No.
Example: 503-05J
Prefix Voltage Ratio
Gearbox
Voltage
115/230 230/460 DC
rows. The top row is timing
Inch Lbs. Hand HP Amp Amp Amp Face
A*
12
95 (belt)
120 (chain)
95 (belt)
M1- T or B 1J, 1G, 3J
or 3G
0- 5M
CH
5M
25
10
25
25
10
25
16 1,3,V,D- 50 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 42C belt driven, and the bottom
9.50 5.68 ** 15 M1- T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 0- 16 1,3,V,D- 40 G or J 1/6 1.3/.6 1.7 42C
3.50 3-G
1-J mounting package and 20
128 (chain)
98 (belt)
132 (chain)
M1- T or B
or 3G
1J, 1G, 3J
or 3G
0-
CH
5M
CH
10
25
10
10
25
10
16 1,3,V,D- 30 G or J 1/6
3.6/1.9
3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 42C

row is chain driven
1.37 gearmotor ordering 93 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 25
information. The box 30 M1- T or B or 3G
0- 25 1,3,V,D- 20 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/.6 2.5 42C
1.75 130 (chain) CH 10 10
.38 immediately left shows the 5M
89 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25
possible drive positions. 40 M1- T or B 0- 25 1,3,V,D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/.6 2.5 42C
Front View Top View 128 (chain or 3G CH 10 10
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right 1-J 87 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 30 25
3-G 50 M1- T or B or 3G
0- 25 1,3,V,D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/.6 2.5 42C
107 (chain) CH 12 10
Bottom Drive 84 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 25
60 M1- T or B or 3G 0- 33 1,3,V,D- 10 G or J 1/3 7.2/3.6 1.6/.8 3.5 42C
Note: 107 (chain) CH 10 10
B DIA.* This arrangement allows for the drive 89 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 30 25
1.75 .33 75 M1- T or B or 3G 0- 33 1,3,V,D- 10 G or J 1/3 7.2/3.6 1.6/.8 3.5 42C
to be mounted below the conveyor 100 (chain) CH 12 10
belt, on either side of the conveyor, 67 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 40 25
100 M1- T or B or 3G 0- 33 1,3,V,D- 10 G or J 1/3 7.2/3.6 1.6/.8 3.5 42C
and with the motor perpendicular to 67 (chain) CH 16 10
9.50 5.30
A*
120
150
82 (belt)
82 (chain)
68 (belt)
68 (chain)
M1-
M1-
T or B
T or B
1J, 1G, 3J
or 3G
1J, 1G, 3J
or 3G
0-
0-
5M
CH
5M
CH
25
10
30
12
25
10
25
10
50
50
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V,D-
05
05
G or J
G or J
1/2
1/2
8.8/4.4
8.8/4.4
2.0/1.0
2.0/1.0
5
5
56C
56C
Step 3:
1.86
B DIA. *
3.50
1.37
3-J 1-G mounting package and
gearmotor ordering
175
200
59 (belt)
59 (chain)
51 (belt)
51 (chain)
M1-
M1-
T or B
1J, 1G, 3J
or 3G
T or B 1J, 1G, 3J
or 3G
0-
0-
5M
CH
5M
CH
34
14
40
16
25
10
25
10
50
50
1,3,V,D-
1,3,V, D-
05
05
G or J
G or J
1/2
1/2
8.8/4.4
8.8/4.4
2.0/1.0
2.0/1.0
5
5
56C
56C
Choose speed
.38
possible drive positions. 46 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 44 25
Front View Top View 225 M1- T or B
or 3G
0- 50 1,3,V,D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
46 (chain) CH 18 10
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right 1-G 3-J *Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location chart

The motor can be rotated in 90 O Motor Dimension Chart M1-T1J0-5M4025 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt) 331-10J (115v 1PH Gearmotor@100 FPM)
increments when attaching it to
161 163 16V 251 253 25V 331 333 33V 501 503 50V 503 (ID) Notes:
the gearbox. This allows the user
flexibility when deciding where the A 11.39 11.26 8.22 9.22 9.25 9.15 9.01 9.24 10.11 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved See Drive Accessories pages (p. 90 & 91) for
motor capacitor and work box will B 5.20 4.69 4.98 5.19 5.20 4.99 6.20 5.20 5.01 6.15 6.19 4.98 7.23 2. Torque values are based upon rimmomg torque optional controllers, motor starters, e-stops,
be located. 3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2 HP. Add an ID to the end of the motor part number for the 230/460 VAC 3 PH motors only cords, switches,
4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them and plugs
Step 4:
Speed Mounting Voltage Run drive sizing
Step 4 Page 86
Fixed or Variable Speed (p. 86)
Top or Bottom Drive Step 6
Mounting Part Number Motor Part No. Motor Information
Sizing Information Example: 503-05J Voltage
Example: M1-B3J0-CH1410
FPM* Inch Lbs.
95 (belt)
Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr. Sprkt Conv Sprkt
5M 25 25
Prefix Voltage Ratio Hand HP Amp Amp Amp Face Step 5:
12 M1- T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 0- 16 1,3,V,D- 50 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 42C
120 (chain) or 3G CH 10 10 Choose voltage
95 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 25
15
128 (chain)
M1- T or B
or 3G
0-
CH 10 10
16 1,3,V,D- 40 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 42C requirements
98 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 25
20 M1- T or B or 3G
0- 16 1,3,V,D- 30 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 42C
132 (chain) CH 10 10
93 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 25
30 M1- T or B or 3G
0- 25 1,3,V,D- 20 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/.6 2.5 42C
130 (chain) CH 10 10
89 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 25
40 M1- T or B or 3G
0- 25 1,3,V,D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/.6 2.5 42C
128 (chain CH 10 10
87 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 30 25 Step 6:
50 M1- T or B or 3G
0- 25 1,3,V,D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/.6 2.5 42C
107 (chain) CH 12
5M 25
10
25
Put together two part
84 (belt) M1- T or B
1J, 1G, 3J
0- 10 G or J
60 33 1,3,V,D- 1/3 7.2/3.6 1.6/.8 3.5 42C
107 (chain) or 3G CH 10 10 numbers, drive
89 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 30 25
75
100 (chain)
M1- T or B or 3G 0-
CH 12 10
33 1,3,V,D- 10 G or J 1/3 7.2/3.6 1.6/.8 3.5 42C mounting package and
1J, 1G, 3J 5M
100
67 (belt)
67 (chain)
M1- T or B or 3G 0-
CH
40
16
25
10
33 1,3,V,D- 10 G or J 1/3 7.2/3.6 1.6/.8 3.5 42C gearmotor, by following
120
82 (belt)
M1- T or B
1J, 1G, 3J
or 3G 0-
5M 25 25
50 1,3,V,D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C from left to right
82 (chain) CH 10 10
68 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 30 25
150 M1- T or B or 3G 0- 50 1,3,V,D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
68 (chain) CH 12 10
59 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 34 25
175 M1- T or B or 3G 0- 50 1,3,V,D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
59 (chain) CH 14 10
51 (belt) M1- T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 40 25
200 or 3G
0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
51 (chain) CH 16 10
46 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 44 25
Voltage Key
225 M1- T or B 0- 50 1,3,V,D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
1 115VAC 1 PH
*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM *See Drive Location chart
Mounting Part Number Example: Motor Part No. Example: 3 230/460 VAC 3 PH
M1-T1J0-5M4025 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt) Step 2 331-10J (115v 1PH Gearmotor@100 FPM)
Notes: V 90 VDC w/controller
Torque Sprocket/Timing Pulley Gear Reducer Horsepower D 90 VDC w/o controller

Combinations
125 Z Series Heavy Duty Drives
Side Drive
Note:
B DIA.*
4.14
B DIA. * drive to be mounted on either side
.48 of the conveyor with the motor
A* Reference the drawings to the left for
.87 3.89 the possible drive
Remote Drive
Note:
B DIA. * B DIA. * conveyor and on either side of the
A* conveyor, with the motor
.44 DIA. perpendicular to the drive pulley.
2.75 .50 DIA. dimensional information.
1.74 Drive Location Reference the tables to the
3.75 1.12
Note: 56 frame gear motors extend below

gear box mounting plate and may require
shimming
Top Drive
B DIA.* Note:
1.86 B DIA. * This arrangement allows for the drive
A*
9.50 5.68 **
3.50 3-G 1-J mounting package and
**Dimension reflects top of belt
Bottom Drive
Note:
B DIA.*
1.75 .33 This arrangement allows for the drive
A*
3.50 3-J 1-G mounting package and
B DIA. * information. The box
1.86
.38 immediately left shows the
Front View Top View
The motor can be rotated in 90O Motor Dimension Chart

increments when attaching it to the 161 163 16V 251 253 25V 331 333 33V 501 503 50V 503 (ID)
gearbox. This allows the user flexibility
A 11.39 11.26 8.22 9.22 9.25 9.15 9.01 9.24 10.11 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08
when deciding where the motor
capacitor and work box will be located. B 5.20 4.69 4.98 5.19 5.20 4.99 6.20 5.20 5.01 6.15 6.19 4.98 7.23
88
Heavy Duty Electric
Side Drive
Example: M1-S1J0 Example: 161 - 50J Voltage
Torque (DTT) 115/230 230/460 DC
FPM* Inch Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Prefix Voltage Ratio Gearbox
Hand HP Amp Amp Amp Face
12 120 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 16 1,3,V,D- 50 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
15 128 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 16 1,3,V,D- 40 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
20 132 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 16 1,3,V,D- 30 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
30 130 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 25 1,3,V,D- 20 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 2.5 42C
40 128 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 25 1,3,V,D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 2.5 42C
60 107 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 33 1,3,V,D- 10 G or J 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
120 82 M1- S 1J or 3G 0 50 1,3,V,D- 05 G or J 1/2 7.4/3.7 2.1/2.0 4.8 56C
Remote Drive
Example: M1-R1G0 Example: 251-20G Voltage
FPM* Inch Lbs. Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Prefix Voltage Ratio Hand HP Amp Amp Amp Face
12 120 M1- R 1G or 3J 0 16 1,3,V,D- 50 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
15 128 M1- R 1G or 3J 0 16 1,3,V,D- 40 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
20 132 M1- R 1G or 3J 0 16 1,3,V,D- 30 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
30 130 M1- R 1G or 3J 0 25 1,3,V,D- 20 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 2.5 42C
40 128 M1- R 1G or 3J 0 25 1,3,V,D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 2.5 42C
60 107 M1- R 1G or 3J 0 33 1,3,V,D- 10 G or J 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
120 82 M1- R 1G or 3J 0 50 1,3,V,D- 05 G or J 1/2 7.4/3.7 2.1/2.0 4.8 56C
M1-S3J0 (Side Drive Mounting) 253-15J (230/460v 3PH Gearmotor@40 FPM) 1 115 VAC 1 PH For optional AC controls, see p. 90
Top or Bottom Drive
Example: M1-B3J0-CH1410 Example: 503-05J Voltage
FPM* Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr. Sprkt Conv Sprkt Prefix Voltage Ratio Hand HP Face
95 (belt) 5M 25 25
120 (chain) or 3G CH 10 10
95 (belt) 5M 25 25
128 (chain) or 3G CH 10 10
98 (belt) 5M 25 25
20 M1- T or B 1J,or1G,
3G
3J
0- 16 1,3,V,D- 30 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
132 (chain) CH 10 10
93 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 25
30 M1- T or B or 3G
0- 25 1,3,V,D- 20 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 2.5 42C
130 (chain) CH 10 10
89 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 25
40 M1- T or B or 3G
0- 25 1,3,V,D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 2.5 42C
128 (chain CH 10 10
87 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 30 25
50 M1- T or B or 3G
0- 25 1,3,V,D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 2.5 42C
107 (chain) CH 12 10
84 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 25
107 (chain) CH 10 10
89 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 30 25
100 (chain) CH 12 10
67 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 40 25
67 (chain) CH 16 10
82 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 25
82 (chain) CH 10 10
68 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 30 25
68 (chain) CH 12 10
59 (belt) 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 34 25
59 (chain) CH 14 10
51 (belt) M1- T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 40 25
200 or 3G
0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 7.4/3.7 2.1/1.0 4.8 56C
51 (chain) CH 16 10
46 (belt) M1- T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 44 25
225 0- 50 1,3,V,D- 05 G or J 1/2 7.4/3.7 2.1/1.0 4.8 56C
*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM *See Drive Location chart

M1-T1J0-5M4025 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt) 331-10J (115v 1PH Gearmotor@100 FPM)
Notes:

2. Torque values are based upon running torque See Drive Accessories pages (p. 90 & 91) for
3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2 HP. Add an ID to the end of the motor part number for the 230/460VAC 3ph motors only. optional controllers, motor starters, e-stops,
4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them cords, switches, and plugs
125 Z Series Drive Accessories
Motor Controls
6.00
5.00
30:1 speed range
UL/ULc/CE
5.00
To Order:
Part Number:
UL/ULc/CE
2.84 4.45
IP 20 Enclosure
4.57 5.73 5.13 To Order:
Part Number:*
4X .18 DIA. .34
Standard AC Control

30:1 speed range
7.20
6.35 UL/ULc/CE

Part Number:
2.12
2.20 1.20

.19 UL/ULc
6.35
Run/Stop switch
5.16
To Order:
4.56
2.20 1.20

Motion Controls

5.13 5.75
UL/CSA/CE
IP55 Enclosure
To Order:

Turn to release
2.25 UL/CSA/CE
IP55 Rated

5.88 LOCK-OUT
TAG-OUT
To Order:

3.50
2X .22 DIA.
UL/CSA/CE
IP65 Enclosure
2.37 2.75
To Order:
3.76 Part Number:

Heavy Duty Motor Options

Part Number Description
125-0149-05 ON/OFF switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor
125-0149-06 FORWARD/REVERSE switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor
125-0149-07 8’ cord and plug for 1 PH heavy duty motor
125-0149-09 8’ cord and plug for 90VDC motor - see controller for details
250 Series End Drive Conveyors
Specifications
• Length 3’ to 15’
• Belt is the highest point on the conveyor
Overview Dimensions
.42 .82
W - .25 = W + .31 =
BELT WIDTH FRAME WIDTH W + 4.95
Note: As in all
.62 DIA. 1.38 SHAFT
industries, technical 3/16 KEY LENGTH
specifications will
L
change with
technology updates.
A = (L - D) D
Please contact
factory or see
for the most up-to- 6.19 4.44
date drawings. 1.89 * 1.81
FRAME
39.38
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See page 100. Note: Conveyors 120” and under are built using a single piece frame
Features & Benefits
Conveyor
areas
various types
equipment
• Multi-point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail • Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass
• Crowned sealed drive assembly is designed to promote superior belt
• Crowned sealed tail assembly is tracking, and is equipped with
designed to promote excellent belt superior sealed ball bearings
tracking and is equipped with that are filled with high
performance grease
superior needle bearings with
seals that are filled with high • Thrust washers designed into the
performance grease drive assembly back-flexing idlers
provide axial float, allowing the
• Thrust washers designed into the assembly to move with the natural
tail assembly provide axial float, camber of the belt and protect
which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and bearings against off-center load
protect bearings against off-center load conditions conditions
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings • Grease fitting design in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of
while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time
during lubrication
lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the drive assembly
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, though self-aligning bearings, providing optimal conditions to move the
providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
idler ends of the conveyor tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
250 Series End Drive Conveyors
Technical Data

equivalent load.
700 630
A conveyor application that is accumulating a 50 pound load, for example, 600
demands the conveyor to carry more than 50 pounds. As such, we have
Lbs. 420
400 350
300
requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gear motor 210
175 210 175175
arrangement that will provide the correct torque. 200 140 105 140
105 70
100 70 52.5
35
2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
Conveyor Belt Width (in.)
cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Pushing (Drive Location C&D)
Use Figure 94-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the Note: See page 95
nominal load you need to carry. Each conveyor width listed shows a total load Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications.
carrying capacity for pushing and pulling applications. The 250 conveyor can Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2
carry 35 pounds per inch of width (with the exception of a 24” wide conveyor, (except on the 24” conveyor).
which can carry only 175 lbs.) Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.
2. Accumulation 2.
Two. Otherwise, multiply the nominal load times an accumulation factor. (0.2
for accumulation belts listed on page 100 and 0.3 for MAA standard 2.0
urethane). Enter Accumulation Factor on Line Two.
1.6
1.5 1.4
1.1
Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not 1.0 0.8
require an incline or decline enter zero on Line Three. For inclining or
angle of incline, then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from
Line One. The angle limit is 30 degrees. Enter result on Line Three. 0.5
0.3

carry the sum of Lines One through Three. If the sum is
greater than the load capacity listed for the width you have
Angle
Factor 0.3
5 10
0.6
15
0.8
20
1.1
25
1.4
30
1.6
chosen, please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory.
4. Conveyor Friction 4. Conveyor Friction - Figure 94-C

in, add 4 to the conveyor width in inches, then multiply by 6, or simply 250
224
choose the value from Figure 94-C. Enter result on Line Four.
176
200
Equivalent Load
160
144
150
104
100 96
Write down the equivalent load on your application data sheet (found in
the back of the catalog). The equivalent load will be needed to properly 50
size a gear motor for the conveyor.
0
Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number. Conveyor Width 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
Frictional Load 96 104 112 128 144 160 176 224 272
How to Order
Drive Location
Construction
Drive Pulley
Frame Style
Drive Type
Order Code
Tail Pulley
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
Frame
Series
Width
Width
Belt
Belt
Belt
2 E S H - - -
Step 1

2 = 250 E = End Drive S = Standard E = 1.81” Stainless Steel H = Straight Frame
Step 2
Widths Lengths* Order Code

2” 02 36” - S P F 0 3 6
3” 03 48” - S P F 0 4 8
4” 04 60” - S P F 0 6 0
6” 06 72” - S P F 0 7 2
8” 08 96” - S P F 0 9 6
10” 10 120” - S P F 1 2 0
12” 12 132” - 0 9 6 0 3 6
18” 18 156” - 1 2 0 0 3 6
24” 24 180” - 1 4 4 0 3 6
*Contact factory for special lengths. Lengths 120” and under are
Step 3 a single piece frame design.

C D
rd rd
da da
an an
St Cap *.625” Dia.
L St Standard Q
Solid Output Shaft
A B *.625” Dia. *.625” Dia.

Y
A&B are drive pulling Dual Output
*3/16 square key included
the customer. Conveyors longer than
Choose three-digit belt code on page 100.
120” ship unassembled. Accessories
such as Motors, Stands, Mounts, and
Example: 2ESBH10-SPF120-ALQ-MAA Guides are packaged separately and
250 Series End Drive conveyor with standard construction and 1.81” powder are shipped unassembled with the
conveyor to prevent damage during
coated frame. Conveyor measures 10” wide by 120” long with solid output
shipment. Complete assembly can be
drive pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the A provided upon request; please contact
position. The conveyor has a standard urethane belt. our factory for details.
250 Series Center Drive Conveyors
Specifications
• Length 4’ to 28’
• Belt is highest point on conveyor
Overview Dimensions
.42 .82
W - .25 = W + .31 =
BELT WIDTH FRAME WIDTH W + 4.95
Note: As in all .62 DIA.

1.38 SHAFT
industries, technical 3/16 KEY
LENGTH
specifications will L
change with
technology updates.
(L - D) /2 D (L - D) /2
Please contact
factory or see
www.qcindustries.com 4.44
for the most up-to- 1.81 6.19
1.89 * FRAME
date drawings.
54.75
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See page 100. Note: Conveyors 120” and under are built using a single piece frame
Features &Features
Benefits
Conveyor
areas
various types
equipment
• Multi-point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail • Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass
• Crowned sealed drive assembly is designed to promote superior belt
• Crowned sealed tail assembly is tracking, and is equipped with
designed to promote excellent belt superior sealed ball bearings
tracking and is equipped with that are filled with high
performance grease
superior needle bearings with
seals that are filled with high • Thrust washers designed into the
performance grease drive assembly back-flexing idlers
provide axial float, allowing the
• Thrust washers designed into the assembly to move with the natural
tail assembly provide axial float, camber of the belt and protect
which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and bearings against off-center load
protect bearings against off-center load conditions conditions
• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings • Grease fitting design in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of
while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time
during lubrication
lubrication
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the drive assembly
• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, though self-aligning bearings, providing optimal conditions to move the
providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors heaviest loads in low profile conveyors
idler ends of the conveyor tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal
250 Series Center Drive Conveyors
Technical Data

equivalent load.
A conveyor application that is accumulating a 50 pound load, for example,

demands the conveyor to carry more than 50 pounds. As such, we have 700 630
developed certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry.
600
Lbs.
requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gear motor 400 350
300
210
200 175
105
140
100
2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs.
Use Figure 98-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the Conveyor Belt Width (in.)
nominal load you need to carry. Each conveyor width listed shows a total load
carrying capacity for pushing and pulling applications. The 250 conveyor can
carry 35 pounds per inch of width (with the exception of a 24” wide conveyor,
which can carry only 175 lbs.) Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.
2. Accumulation 2.
Two. Otherwise, multiply the nominal load times an accumulation factor. (0.2
for accumulation belts listed on page 100 and 0.3 for MAA standard 2.0
urethane). Enter Accumulation Factor on Line Two.
1.6
1.1
1.0 0.8
require an incline or decline enter zero on Line Three. For inclining or
angle of incline, then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from
Line One. The angle limit is 30 degrees. Enter result on Line Three. 0.5
0.3
**Verify Load Capacity: 0.0
carry the sum of Lines One through Three. If the sum is
greater than the load capacity listed for the width you have
Angle
Factor
0
0.0 0.3
5 10
0.6
15
0.8
20
1.1
25
1.4
30
1.6
chosen, please choose a wider conveyor.
in, add (width x 8) + 80, or simply choose the value from Figure 98-C. 272
Enter result on Line Four. 250
224
176
200
Equivalent Load
160
Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-4) lbs.
144
150 128
112
Write down the equivalent load on your application data sheet (found in 104
100 96
the back of the catalog). The equivalent load will be needed to properly
size a gear motor for the conveyor.
50
0
Conveyor Width 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 18 24
Frictional Load 96 104 112 128 144 160 176 224 272
How to Order
Drive Location
Construction
Drive Pulley
Frame Style
Order Code
Drive Type
Tail Pulley
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
Frame
Series
Width
Width
Belt
Belt
Belt
2 C S H - - -
Step 1

2 = 250 C = Center Drive S = Standard E = 1.81” Stainless Steel H = Straight Frame
Custom colors available - contact factory
Step 2
Lengths* Order Code
Widths 48” - S P F D 0 4 8
2” 02 60” - S P F D 0 6 0
3” 03 72” - S P F D 0 7 2
4” 04 96” - S P F D 0 9 6
6” 06 120” - S P F D 1 2 0
144” - 0 4 8 D 0 4 8
8” 08
168” - 0 6 0 D 0 6 0
10” 10
192” - 0 7 2 D 0 7 2
12” 12 240” - 0 9 6 D 0 9 6
18” 18 288” - 1 2 0 D 1 2 0
24” 24 336” - 1 4 4 D 1 4 4
*Contact factory for special lengths. Lengths 120” and under are a single piece frame design
Step 3
rd rd
da da
an an
St Cap *.625” Dia.
L St Standard Q
A B Solid Output Shaft
*.625” Dia. *.625” Dia.

Y
Dual Output
*3/16 square key included

Step 4 As standard, we assemble the conveyor,
Choose three-digit belt ordering code on page 100. the customer. Conveyors longer than
120” ship unassembled. Accessories
such as Motor, Stands, Mounts, and
Example: 2CSBH18-096D096-ALQ-MAA Guides are packaged separately and
250 Series Center Drive conveyor with standard construction and 1.81” are shipped unassembled with the
powder coated frame. Conveyor measures 18” wide by 240” long with solid conveyor to prevent damage during
output drive pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the A shipment. Complete assembly can be
position. The conveyor has a standard urethane belt. provided upon request; please contact
our factory for details.
250 Series Conveyors
g
ptio
(°F)
ture peratin
l
teria
on ( ficient
)
scri
ches
ture
e
pera rt
)
Cod
(°F)
CoF
e Ma
a
e De
O
Max t Term P
t
s (in
Thic ge Bel
of F de Coef
Tem Ambint
ring
tic
ac
ac
knes
Colo
Tem
pera
Orde
Surf
-Sta
Surf
ricti
ra
r
si
Ave
Sho
Max
FDA
Anti
Belt
Top
Top
Belt
Top
Multi-Purpose Belts
C. Option #3-Perforated Belt MAD Smooth, Perforations Urethane White YES LOW 212 176 YES 0.075
High Friction Belts

C. Black Lateral Grooved High Adhesion FAD Longitudinal Groove PVC Black NO HIGH 194 158 YES 0.083
D. Black Rough Top High Adhesion FAF Rough Top PVC Black NO HIGH 212 176 YES 0.185

C. Blue Nitrile Heat Resistor HAD Coarse Structure Nitrile Rubber Blue NO MED 300 212 YES 0.079
D. White Nitrile Heat Resistor HAE Smooth Nitrile Rubber White NO MED 300 212 YES 0.067
Cut Resistant Belts

A. Standard Urethane IAB Smooth Urethane White YES LOW 212 176 YES 0.075
B. Black Dimple Top Cut Resistor IAC Dimple Top Hard Urethane Black NO HIGH 248 212 YES 0.083
C. Rugged Poly Cut Resistor IAD Structured Nitrile Rubber Black NO MED 176 176 YES 0.100
FDA Belts
Translucent Belts

Non-Marking Belts
A. Negative Pyramid Profile SAD Textured Urethane White YES MED 212 176 YES 0.078


QC Industries offers conveyor belting for a Series conveyors. If you have a specific need To Order With Conveyor:
wide variety of applications and industries. that is not covered on these pages, please Please use the three-digit QC belt code
These pages cover a number of the more contact one of our sales engineers directly at number for conveyor ordering on pages
popular belts we have provided through the the factory to discuss your application 95 and 99.
years. These belts have all been tested at QC parameters.
Industries and offer a compatible fit to the 250
Multi-Purpose Belts
AA AB AD
M M M
QUICK SHIP!
High-Friction Belts
A B D F
FA FA FA FA
A C D E
AA AA AA AA
A B D E
HA HA HA HA
Cut-Resistant Belts
B C D
IA IA IA
FDA/USDA Belts
A B C D E
UA UA UA UA UA

A B C D
EA EA EA EA
Translucent Belts
A B C
TA TA TA
A B C D E
PA PA PA PA PA
Non-Marking Belts
A B C D
NA NA NA NA
A B C D E
RA RA RA RA RA
D
SA


250 Series Side & Guide Rails
Fixed Side Rails
W + 1.06
W + 1.06
W - .19
W + .06
.46 *
.33 *
2.22 2.35
Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides
1/3” Side Rails Part No. 250-0153- with wear strip
Part No. 250-0170-
250-0153 pictured To Order: To Order:
Fill in the last three digits of the part Fill in the last three digits of the part
number with the nominal conveyor number with the nominal conveyor
length in inches. length in inches.
Ex. 250-0153-048 (Center or End Drive Rail) Ex. 250-0170-024 (Center or End Drive Rail)
W + 1.19 W + 1.19
W - .19
W + .06
.78 1.03 * .88

.93 *
2.91
2.81 2.03
2.03
Aluminum extruded 1” high sides

1” Side Rails Aluminum extruded 1” high sides with wear strip
Part No. 250-0174- Part No. 250-0178-
250-0178 pictured
To Order: To Order:
W + 1.19 W + 1.19
W + .06 W - .18
1.78 2.05 * 1.90

1.93 *
3.81 3.93
2.03 2.03
2” Side Rails Aluminum extruded 2” high sides

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides with wear strip
To Order: To Order:
Note 1: W = nominal belt width in inches * Dimension reflects use of standard urethane belt (MAA) see page 100
Note 2: All rails are sold in sets
Note 3: Side Rails do not run the full length of conveyor. They are indented 1 11/16” from either end

W - .10 W - .25
3.00 MAX. 3.00 MAX.
ADJ. ADJ.
2.50 MAX. *
1.13 MIN. * 3.25 MAX. *
1.99 MIN. *
4.34
W + 2.81
W + 2.81
W + 9.12 MAX. W + 9.12 MAX
Part No. 250-0281- - Part No. 250-0282- -
250-0281-048-T pictured
W - .38
3.00 MAX. To Order:
ADJ. Fill in the last three digits of part number with the nominal
length of the conveyor. Choose a set screw adjustment or a
thumb wheel adjustment mechanism by indicating (S) for set
5.25 MAX. * screw and (T) for thumb wheel at the end of the part number.
3.00 MIN. *
Example 250-0281-120 -T
adjustment for a 120” long conveyor
The 2-Axis Adjustable Guides are designed to guide the

product being conveyed. The rails can adjust vertically and
horizontally, offering the end user the ultimate in flexibility.
W + 2.81 Choose from a set screw or thumb wheel adjustment. The
thumb wheel is shown in the above picture and is ideal for
W + 9.12 MAX.
3” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides quick adjustments, because no tools are required.
Part No. 250-0283- -
W + 1.57
W + 1.42
W - 1.21
W - 1.21
2.40 MAX. *
2.13 MIN. *
3.94
3.28
1.62 MAX. *
1.03 MIN. *

Indented Guides Part No. 250-0218-
Part No. 250-0219-
250-0219 pictured
W + 1.57
W - 1.31
To Order:
3.03 * Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal
4.92
Example 250-0281-120
1” adustable guide rail with wear strip for a 120” long
conveyor

Part No. 250-0222-
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See page 100

250 Series Automation Accessories
To Order:
LANES LD S
Construction (S - Standard)
Mounting Type (F - Frame or T - Tee slot)
RAIL CLEARANCE
2" OR 3" # of Lanes (2,3,4 etc)
# of Rails (1, 2, 3, etc)
Conveyor Length (in inches)
RAILS
Conveyor Width (in inches)
Example
Rail Clearance Height (2” or 3”)
LD-2-08144-12FS
2” Lane Divider for 8” wide 144” long
conveyor. One rail with two lanes
Lane Dividers Lane Dividers mounted to the conveyor frame
For part number see box to right

2 in. 125-0230-02 2 in. 125-0220-02
3 in. 125-0230-03 3 in. 125-0220-03
4 in. 125-0230-04 4 in. 125-0220-04
6 in. 125-0230-06 6 in. 125-0220-06
8 in. 125-0230-08 8 in. 125-0220-08
10 in. 125-0230-10 10 in. 125-0220-10
12 in. 125-0230-12 12 in. 125-0220-12
18 in. 125-0230-18 18 in. 125-0220-18
24 in. 125-0230-24 24 in. 125-0220-24
Note 1: Transfer plates are not intended

Note:
for use with high friction belts.
Transfer plates are not intended for use
Note 2: Discharge conveyor must be
with high friction belts
pushing
Note 3: Customer to drill screw holes to
mount plate

To Order:
1. Select an adjustable stop for 1” Note:

sides, 2” sides, or single tee slot
(See page 102) The adjustable diverter comes with a
5’ piece of UHMW rail and (2)
2. Using the chart below, fill in the mounting assemblies that the user
part number using the nominal width can utilize to help orient the product
of the conveyor for the last two digits around a 90O transfer.
of the part number
Part No.
1” Sides 125-0232-WW
2” Sides 125-0234-WW
Single Tee Slot 125-0233-WW
Example: 125-0232-04
1” aluminum side rails Part No. 125-0250-000

Note:
Standard Mounts These mounts are intended for surface mounting only. The 250 stands do not
require a conveyor mount when ordering stands on pages 106 & 107.
.22 DIA. .34 DIA. W + 1.46
.41 .59
To Order:
1.15 .88
3.06 directly to the conveyor frame. The
2.06 * frame has mounting holes every 3”.
1.32 1.32
.31
.13 1.25
.38 .135
SLOT W + 1.09 MAX. Part No. 125-0181-04 (Frame)*
3.50 W + .57 MIN.
Universal Adjustable Side Mount W + 1.71
W + 1.46
.22 DIA. .34 DIA.
.59
1.53 To Order:
.88 Frame Mounted version attaches
.13 .31 4.81 5.28 *
frame has mounting holes every 3”.
3.10 3.07
1.25
Part No. 125-0182-04 (Frame)*

.38 .135 W + 1.09 MAX.
Universal Raised Side Mount SLOT W + .57 MIN.
3.50 W + 1.71

necessary hardware
5/16 DIA.
.22 1.00 THRU HOLE
To Order:
.66
2.04 *
1.60 Attaches directly to the conveyor
frame. The frame has mounting holes
every 3”.
.135 1.56
3.00 W + 1.37 Part No. 125-0010-00*
Tee Mount 4.00 W + 2.00

necessary hardware
Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor and mounts
the conveyor to a flat surface.
11/32 DIA.
5/16-18 To Order:
.63 SET SCREW Attaches directly to the underside of
the conveyor frame. To order, use the
.257 DIA. part number below and fill in the
THRU HOLE 2.89 * nominal conveyor width in inches for
1.25 .16 .43 the last two digits.
.84
Part No. 125-0011-WW *
W - 1.50
W - .75
W + 1.00 Example: 125-0011-04*
W + 1.50 conveyor

Notes:
necessary hardware
Bottom mount can attach conveyor to a horizontal or vertical surface.
Cannot be used with high adhesion belts.

250 Series Stands

To order:
Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches) There are three different stand types.
WW H1 - H2 H1 - H2
06 - 09 33 - 36
09 - 12 36 - 39 See the next page for table of part numbers
12 - 15 39 - 42
15 - 18 42 - 45
18 - 21 45 - 48
H1 - H2 21 - 24 48 - 51 NOTE: No additional mounts are required. The mounts are
included with the stand but are specific to where the stand is
24 - 27 51 - 54 attached to the conveyor. See opposing page.
27 - 30 54 - 57
Stand Widths-WW (nominal conveyor width in inches) height range is 12 - 15 inches
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24
Aluminum Cross Ties

To order:
Cross Ties - Available Lengths
Part No. LLL
Inches LLL 125 - 0235 - F F F
24” 024
36” 036 Enter length of cross ties needed into the “LLL”
48” 048 section above. A quantity of one includes (2) cross
60” 060 ties. Note: Cross ties require customer to cut to
72” 072 length because of stand placement variations.
96” 096 Example:125-0235-024
120” 120
144” 144
To be used in conjunction with the aluminum stands
at the top of the page. See opposing page for
typical layouts
Casters Swivel-In T Nut

To order:
To order:
Part No. 125-0122-04
Swivel locking caster Part No.
Order (2) per stand 125-0074-036 (Qty 1)
125-0074-036-SET (Qty 4)
Casters can be added to either
aluminum or steel stands. Swivel The Swivel-In Tee Nut is ideal for
locking casters increase stand mounting brackets to an
height by 5.50”. aluminum stand, and allows quick
Casters should only be used with mounting location changes.
stands that are 1/3 as wide as 1/4 - 20 thread in Tee-Nut is provided
they are tall. for attaching accessories
Casters are not recommended on

multi-frame conveyors.

NOTE: The conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the overall height
End Drive Typical Stand Layout
Drive Support Stand
Frame Joint Stand
Example: 0182-33-36-12 Example: 0182FJ-33-36-12 Example: 0182DS-33-36-12
Center Drive Typical Stand Layout
Frame Joint Stand Frame Joint Stand
Example: 0182-33-36-18 Example: 0182FJ-33-36-18 Example: 0182-33-36-18
Aluminum Exact Width Stand Frame Joint Stand Drive Support Stand
Prefix H1-H2* WW** Prefix H1-H2* WW** Prefix H1-H2* WW**
0182- 03-06 see below¹ 0182FJ- 06-09 see below¹ 0182DS- 12-15 see below
0182- 06-09 see below¹ 0182FJ- 09-12 see below¹ 0182DS- 15-18 see below To Order:
0182FJ- 12-15 0182DS- 18-21 see below
1) Choose the height range
0182- 09-12 see below¹ see below
from the left and enter into
0182- 12-15 see below 0182FJ- 15-18 see below 0182DS- 21-24 see below H1 & H2 section of the part
0182- 15-18 see below 0182FJ- 18-21 see below 0182DS- 24-27 see below number
0182- 18-21 see below 0182FJ- 21-24 see below 0182DS- 27-30 see below
2) Enter the conveyor width
0182- 21-24 see below 0182FJ- 24-27 see below 0182DS- 30-33 see below into the WW section
3) If the conveyor is over
120” in length, it will be
0182- 30-33 see below 0182FJ- 33-36 see below 0182DS- 39-42 see below constructed in sections.
0182- 33-36 see below 0182FJ- 36-39 see below 0182DS- 42-45 see below Those sections are denoted
on the conveyor ordering
page (pg. 95 or 99). Place a
0182- 39-42 see below 0182FJ- 42-45 see below 0182DS- 48-51 see below stand at each frame joint.
42-45 see below 0182FJ- 45-48 see below 0182DS- 51-54 see below Denote those stands by
0182-
adding the suffix FJ to the
stand part number.
0182FJ- 54-57 see below Example: 0182DS-27-30-10 4) End drive 250’s require a
0182- 51-54 see below
stand at the drive. Denote
0182- 54-57 see below 0182FJ- 57-60 see below ¹Not compatible with the following
this stand by adding the
conveyor widths: 2”, 3”, 4”
0182- 57-60 see below Example: 0182FJ-27-30-10 suffix DS to the stand part
Example: 0182-27-30-10 number.
**WW (Conveyor Width)
* Conveyor adds 1.89” to the 02 04
03 06 08 10 12 18 24
overall height

250 Series Drives
The equivalent load was determined in the conveyor technical data pages (pages 94 & 98). To choose a gear motor combination that works best
for the application, the next step is to convert that equivalent load into the torque required and size a drive based upon its use. The user must
know the belt speed (in feet per minute), service factor (determined below), and the duty cycle of the application. The steps below guide the user
through this process. These steps will utimately compare the torque required to move the load on the conveyor (Required Conveyor Drive
Torque) and the torque the drive train is capable of producing (Supplied Drive Train Torque).

Enter the equivalent load determined on page 94 or 98. Divide this number by 2. The result
equals the torque required for the application, or the required conveyor drive torque (RCDT). Enter RCDT on Line One.

Choose the belt speed from one of the following pages to write down the drive train torque (DTT) for the
selected speed. Please note that there are two gearbox types listed; standard and high capacity, for each speed.
Enter the drive train torque on Line Two.
3. Enter Service Factor (SF) 3.

Use Chart 108-A below, based upon the hours of operation per day as well as starts and stops per hour. Enter
the result on Line Three.


Compare Line 4 (the supplied drive train torque

[SDTT]) to Line 1 (the required conveyor drive torque Hours of Operation per Day
[RCDT]). If the SDTT is equal to or greater than RCDT, 24 16 8 2
then you have selected the proper drive. SDTT > 2.1 1.8 1.6 1.4
RCDT. If not, then:
Service Factor
2.0 1.7 1.5 1.3 Factor

B) Choose high capacity gearbox
C) Choose a wider conveyor 1.8 1.5 1.3 1.1
D) Consult factory 1.7 1.4 1.2 1.0
Starts and Stops per Hour 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Example: Example:
150 / 2 = 75 (RCDT) 250 / 2 = 125 (RCDT)
30 FPM (From page 111 - end drive) 100 FPM (From page 113 - center drive)
169 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) (Standard capacity gearbox) 181 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) (High Capacity Gearbox)
169 / 1.2 = 140 inch lbs. (SDTT) 181 / 1.5 = 121 inch lbs. (SDTT)
RCDT = 75 RCDT = 125

SDTT = 140 SDTT = 121
140 7 75 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque) 121 < 125 (Gearmotor assembly will not provide adequate torque)

Step 1:
Choose an end or
Step 2 Drive Sizing center drive (end drive
Location Info pages 110 & 111,
center drive pages 112
Step 1
250 Series End Drive
& 113)
End Drive Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - End Drive
Step 2:
OB0
/
FPM*
Torque (DTT)
Inch Lbs.
185
Prefix Mounting Position*
Example: M2-C1G0-8M2234
Gearbox Belt/Chain
Size
0-
GMtr.
Sprocket
Conv
Sprocket Prefix
Example: 253-15G
Voltage Ratio
Gearbox
Hand HP Amp Amp
Voltage
115/230 230/460 DC
Amp Face
Choose mounting
OB3 Drive Location 15 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 22 34 16 1,3,V, D- 50 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 42C
/
3J 1G
20
317
186
259
204
M2- E 1G or 3J
3-
0-
3-
0-
8M 22 32 16
16
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
40
30
G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6
1.3/.6
1.7
1.7
42C
42C
arrangement & drive
25 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 22 34 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9
-.04
location
321 3-
.78 169 0- 16 1,3,V, D- 30 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 42C
30 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 25 32
266 3- 25 1,3,V, D- 30 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/.6 2.5 42C
144 0- 16 1,3,V, D- 20 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 42C
40 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 22 32
A0 287 3- 33 1,3,V, D- 20 G or J 1/3 7.2/3.6 1.6/.8 3.5 42C
A3 50
170
M2- E 1G or 3J 0- 8M 22 34
25 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/.6 2.5 42C
359 3- 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
141 0- 25 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/.6 2.5 42C
60 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 25 32
297 3- 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
170 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 7.2/3.6 1.6/.8 3.5 42C
75 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 22 34
371 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 3/4 10.6/5.3 3/1.5 7.6 56C
10.94
3.64
80
90
160
349
140
307
M2-
M2-
E
E
1G
1G
or 3J
or 3J
0-
3-
0-
3-
8M
8M
22
25
32
32
33
75
33
75
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
10
10
10
10
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
1/3
3/4
1/3
3/4
7.2/3.6
10.6/5.3
7.2/3.6
10.6/5.3
1.6/.8
3/1.5
1.6/.8
3/1.5
3.5
7.6
3.5
7.6
42C
56C
42C
56C
Step 3:
25 1,3,V, D- 42C
Choose a speed
86 1G or 3J 0- 8M 32 25 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/.6 2.5
100 M2- E
181 3- 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
1G 3J 33 1,3,V, D-
118 0- 10 G or J 1/3 7.2/3.6 1.6/.8 3.5 42C
110 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 28 30
257 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 3/4 10.6/5.3 3/1.5 7.6 56C
110 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 7.2/3.6 1.6/.8 3.5 42C
115 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 28 28
240 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 3/4 10.6/5.3 3/1.5 7.6 56C
71 0- 25 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/.6 2.5 42C
120 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 34 22
150 3- 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
102 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 7.2/3.6 1.6/.8 3.5 42C
E 1G or 3J 8M 30 28
Step 4:
125 M2-
224 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 3/4 10.6/5.3 3/1.5 7.6 56C
128 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
150 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 22 34
253 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1 12.4/6.2 3.4/1.7 10 56C
120 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
160 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 22 32
1.89 239 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1 12.4/6.2 3.4/1.7 10 56C
Note:
If your application requires a standard

180
220
106
210
88
M2-
M2-
E
E
1G
1G
or 3J
or 3J
0-
3-
0-
8M
8M
25
28
32
30
50
1H
50
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
05
05
05
G or J
G or J
G or J
1/2
1
1/2
8.8/4.4
12.4/6.2
8.8/4.4
2.0/1.0
3.4/1.7
2.0/1.0
5
10
5
56C
56C
56C
Run drive sizing
176 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1 12.4/6.2 3.4/1.7 10 56C
capacity gearbox, use the A0, B0, or C0
dimensions. If it uses a high capacity
gearbox, use the A3, B3, C3 dimensions.
C0
C3
230
250
83
164
77
153
M2-
M2-
E
E
1G
1G
or 3J
or 3J
0-
3-
0-
3-
8M
8M
28
30
28
28
50
1H
50
1H
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
05
05
05
05
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
1/2
1
1/2
1
8.8/4.4
12.4/6.2
8.8/4.4
12.4/6.2
2.0/1.0
3.4/1.7
2/0/1.0
3.4/1.7
5
10
5
10
56C
56C
56C
56C
Reference these drawings and the table
below
300
340
64
128
57
113
M2-
M2-
E
E
1G
1G
or 3J
or 3J
0-
3-
0-
3-
8M
8M
32
32
25
22
50
1H
50
1H
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
05
05
05
05
G or J
G or J
G or J
G or J
1/2
1
1/2
1
8.8/4.4
12.4/6.2
8.8/4.4
12.4/6.2
2.0/1.0
3.4/1.7
2.0/1.0
3.4/1.7
5
10
5
10
56C
56C
56C
56C
page 108
13.34 53 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
360 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 34 22
106 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1 12.4/6.2 3.4/1.7 10 56C
*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM *See drive position chart

M2-E3J3-8M3225 (End Mounting Pkg w/high capacity gearbox)
1H3-05J (230/460VAC 1HP Gearmotor@300 FPM)
Step 5:
161 163 16V 251 253 25V 331 333 33V 501 503 50V 503ID 751 753 75V 753ID 1001 1003 100V 1003ID Voltage Key
Choose standard or
high capacity gearbox.
A0 11.39 10.48 11.38 12.38 12.41 12.31 12.17 12.40 13.27 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 1 115 VAC 1 PH For optional AC controls, see p. 38
250 Series
A3 12.18 12.18 12.19 13.26 13.26 13.13 13.26 13.26 14.06 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 15.19 13.26 15.63 13.50 15.19 14.19 16.51 13.76 V 90 VDC w/controller See controller on p. 38
B0 5.20 4.69 4.98 5.19 5.20 4.99 6.20 5.20 5.01 6.15 6.19 4.98 7.23 Notes:
B3 6.78
C0 5.82
6.78
5.82
4.68
5.82
6.19 6.19
5.82 5.82
4.68
5.82
6.19
5.82
6.19
5.82
4.68
5.82
6.15
5.82
6.19 4.98
5.82 5.82
7.23
5.82
7.19
5.82
6.19 6.13
5.82 5.82
6.76
5.82
7.19
5.82
7.19 6.13
5.82 5.82
8.18
5.82
Note: Each speed has
C3 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.19 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 2. Torque values are based upon start-up torque See Drive Accessories pages (p. 114)
3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2, 3/4, and 1 HP. Add an ID to the end of the part number.
for optional controllers, motor starters,
e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs two rows. The top row
is a standard capacity
gearbox, and the
bottom is a high
capacity gearbox.
Some speed and
Step 6 gearbox selections will
have two different
Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - End Drive
horsepower motors.
Step 3 Sizing Information Mounting Part Number Motor Part No. Motor Information
Example: M2-C1G0-8M2234 Example: 253-15G Voltage
FPM*
Torque (DTT)
Inch Lbs.
185
Prefix Mounting Position*
Gearbox Belt/Chain
Size
0-
GMtr.
Sprocket
Conv
Sprocket Prefix Voltage Ratio
Gearbox
Hand HP
115/230 230/460
Amp Amp
DC
Amp Face Step 6:
15 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 22 34 16 1,3,V, D- 50 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 42C
20
317
186
M2- E 1G or 3J
3-
0- 8M 22 32 16 1,3,V, D- 40 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 42C
Choose voltage
259 3-
25
204
M2- E 1G or 3J 0- 8M 22 34 16 1,3,V, D- 30 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 42C requirements
Speed 30
321
169
M2- E 1G or 3J
3-
0- 8M 25 32
16 1,3,V, D- 30 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 42C
266 3- 25 1,3,V, D- 30 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/.6 2.5 42C
144 0- 16 1,3,V, D- 20 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 42C
40
50
287
170
M2-
M2-
E
E
1G
1G
or 3J
or 3J
3-
0-
8M
8M
22
22
32
34
33
25
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
20
15
G or J
G or J
1/3
1/4
7.2/3.6
4.6/2.6
1.6/.8
1.3/.6
3.5
2.5
42C
42C Voltage Step 7:
359 3- 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
60
141
297
M2- E 1G or 3J 0-
3-
8M 25 32
25
50
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
15
15
G or J
G or J
1/4
1/2
4.6/2.6
8.8/4.4
1.3/.6
2.0/1.0
2.5
5
42C
56C
Put together two part
75
170
371
M2- E 1G or 3J 0-
3-
8M 22 34
33
75
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
10
10
G or J
G or J
1/3
3/4
7.2/3.6
10.6/5.3
1.6/.8
3/1.5
3.5
7.6
42C
56C numbers, motor
160 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 7.2/3.6 1.6/.8 3.5 42C
80
349
140
M2- E 1G or 3J
3-
0-
8M 22 32
75
33
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
10
10
G or J
G or J
3/4
1/3
10.6/5.3
7.2/3.6
3/1.5
1.6/.8
7.6
3.5
56C
42C
mounting package and
90 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 25 32
100
307
86
M2- E 1G or 3J
3-
0- 8M 32 25
75
25
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
10
15
G or J
G or J
3/4
1/4
10.6/5.3
4.6/2.6
3/1.5
1.3/.6
7.6
2.5
56C
42C motor by following from
181 3- 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
110
118
257
M2- E 1G or 3J 0-
3-
8M 28 30
33
75
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
10
10
G or J
G or J
1/3
3/4
7.2/3.6
10.6/5.3
1.6/.8
3/1.5
3.5
7.6
42C
56C
left to right
Step 5 115
110
240
M2- E 1G or 3J 0-
3-
8M 28 28
33
75
1,3,V, D-
1,3,V, D-
10
10
G or J
G or J
1/3
3/4
7.2/3.6
10.6/5.3
1.6/.8
3/1.5
3.5
7.6
42C
56C
71 0- 25 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/.6 2.5 42C
120 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 34 22
150 3- 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
102 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 7.2/3.6 1.6/.8 3.5 42C
125 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 30 28
224 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 3/4 10.6/5.3 3/1.5 7.6 56C
128 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
150 M2- E 1G or 3J 8M 22 34
253 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1 12.4/6.2 3.4/1.7 10 56C
120 0- 50 1 3 V D- 05 G or J 1/2 8 8/4 4 2 0/1 0 5 56C
G
Voltage Key
1 115VAC 1 PH
3 230/460 VAC 3 PH
Torque

250 Series End Drive
End Drive
B0 DIA.
B3 DIA.
Drive Location
3J 1G
D0
D3
A0
A3
10.94
1G 3J
3.64
Note:
1.89 *

capacity gearbox, use the A0, B0, C0, and
D0 dimensions. If it uses a high capacity C0
gearbox, use the A3, B3, C3, and D3 C3 7.83
dimensions.

below
13.34

161 163 16V 251 253 25V 331 333 33V 501 503 50V 503ID 751 753 75V 753ID 1H1 1H3 1HV 1H3ID
A0 11.39 10.48 11.38 12.38 12.41 12.31 12.17 12.40 13.27 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08
A3 12.18 12.18 12.19 13.26 13.26 13.13 13.26 13.26 14.06 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 15.19 13.26 15.63 13.50 15.19 14.19 16.51 13.76
B0 5.20 4.69 4.98 5.19 5.20 4.99 6.20 5.20 5.01 6.15 6.19 4.98 7.23
B3 6.78 6.78 4.68 6.19 6.19 4.68 6.19 6.19 4.68 6.15 6.19 4.98 7.23 7.19 6.19 6.13 6.76 7.19 7.19 6.13 8.18
C0 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82
C3 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.19 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56
D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D3 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78

Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - 250 Drive
Torque (DTT) Gearbox GMtr. Conv Gearbox 115/230 230/460 DC
FPM* Prefix Mounting Position* Belt Sprocket Sprocket Prefix Voltage Ratio Hand HP Face
Inch Lbs. Size Amp Amp Amp
185 0- 16 1,3,V, D- 50 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42
15 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 22 34
317 3- 16 1,3,V, D- 50 G3 or J3 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 56
186 1G or 3J 0- 8M 22 32 16 1,3,V, D- 40 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42
20 M2- C
259 3- 16 1,3,V, D- 40 G3 or J3 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 56
204 0- 16 1,3,V, D- 30 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42
25 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 22 34
321 3- 16 1,3,V, D- 30 G3 or J3 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 56
169 0- 16 1,3,V, D- 30 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
30 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 25 32
266 3- 25 1,3,V, D- 30 G3 or J3 1/4 7.4/3.7 2.1/1.0 4.8 56C
144 0- 16 1,3,V, D- 20 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
40 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 22 32
287 3- 33 1,3,V, D- 20 G3 or J3 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 56C
170 0- 25 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/4 7.4/3.7 2.1/1.0 4.8 42C
50 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 22 34
359 3- 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G3 or J3 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
141 0- 25 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/4 7.4/3.7 2.1/1.0 4.8 42C
60 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 25 32
297 3- 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G3 or J3 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
170 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
75 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 22 34
371 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G3 or J3 3/4 10.8/5.4 1.1 7.6 56C
160 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
80 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 22 32
349 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G3 or J3 3/4 10.8/5.4 1.1 7.6 56C
140 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
90 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 25 32
307 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G3 or J3 3/4 10.8/5.4 1.1 7.6 56C
86 0- 25 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/4 7.4/3.7 2.1/1.0 4.8 42C
100 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 32 25
181 3- 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G3 or J3 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
118 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
110 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 28 30
257 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G3 or J3 3/4 10.8/5.4 1.1 7.6 56C
110 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
115 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 28 28
240 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G3 or J3 3/4 10.8/5.4 1.1 7.6 56C
71 0- 25 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/4 7.4/3.7 2.1/1.0 4.8 42C
120 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 34 22
150 3- 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G3 or J3 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
102 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
125 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 30 28
224 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G3 or J3 3/4 10.8/5.4 1.1 7.6 56C
128 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
150 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 22 34
253 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C
120 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
160 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 22 32
239 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C
106 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
180 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 25 32
210 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C
88 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
220 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 28 30
176 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C
83 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
230 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 28 28
164 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C
77 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
250 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 30 28
153 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C
64 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
300 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 32 25
128 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C
57 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
340 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 32 22
113 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C
53 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
360 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 34 22
106 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C

M2-C3J3-8M3225 (250 Mounting Pkg w/high capacity gearbox) 1H3-05J3 (230/460VAC 1HP Gearmotor@300 FPM)
Voltage Key
Notes:
1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved See Drive Accessories (pages 114-115)
2. Torque values are based upon running torque
e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs

250 Series Center Drive
Center Drive
B0 DIA.
B3 DIA.
Drive Location
D0
D3
A0
A3
1G 3J
10.94
3.64
Note:
1.89 *

capacity gearbox, use the A0, B0, C0, and
D0 dimensions. If it uses a high capacity C0 7.83
gearbox, use the A3, B3, C3, and D3 C3
dimensions.

below 13.34

161 163 16V 251 253 25V 331 333 33V 501 503 50V 503ID 751 753 75V 753ID 1H1 1H3 1HV 1H3ID
A0 11.39 10.48 11.38 12.38 12.41 12.31 12.17 12.40 13.27 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08
A3 12.18 12.18 12.19 13.26 13.26 13.13 13.26 13.26 14.06 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 15.19 13.26 15.63 13.50 15.19 14.19 16.51 13.76
B0 5.20 4.69 4.98 5.19 5.20 4.99 6.20 5.20 5.01 6.15 6.19 4.98 7.23
B3 6.78 6.78 4.68 6.19 6.19 4.68 6.19 6.19 4.68 6.15 6.19 4.98 7.23 7.19 6.19 6.13 6.76 7.19 7.19 6.13 8.18
C0 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82 5.82
C3 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.19 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56 6.56
D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D3 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78 .78

Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - 250 Drive
Torque (DTT) Gearbox GMtr. Conv Gearbox 115/230 230/460 DC
FPM* Prefix Mounting Position* Size Belt Sprocket Sprocket Prefix Voltage Ratio Hand HP Face
185 0- 16 1,3,V, D- 50 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 42
15 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 22 34
317 3- 16 1,3,V, D- 50 G3 or J3 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 56
186 1G or 3J 0- 8M 22 32 16 1,3,V, D- 40 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 42
20 M2- C
259 3- 16 1,3,V, D- 40 G3 or J3 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 56
204 0- 16 1,3,V, D- 30 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 42
25 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 22 34
321 3- 16 1,3,V, D- 30 G3 or J3 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1.7 56
169 0- 16 1,3,V, D- 30 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
30 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 25 32
266 3- 25 1,3,V, D- 30 G3 or J3 1/4 7.4/3.7 2.1/1.0 4.8 56C
144 0- 16 1,3,V, D- 20 G or J 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1.7 42C
40 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 22 32
287 3- 33 1,3,V, D- 20 G3 or J3 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 56C
170 0- 25 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/4 7.4/3.7 2.1/1.0 4.8 42C
50 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 22 34
359 3- 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G3 or J3 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
141 0- 25 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/4 7.4/3.7 2.1/1.0 4.8 42C
60 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 25 32
297 3- 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G3 or J3 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
170 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
75 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 22 34
371 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G3 or J3 3/4 10.8/5.4 1.1 7.6 56C
160 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
80 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 22 32
349 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G3 or J3 3/4 10.8/5.4 1.1 7.6 56C
140 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
90 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 25 32
307 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G3 or J3 3/4 10.8/5.4 1.1 7.6 56C
86 0- 25 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/4 7.4/3.7 2.1/1.0 4.8 42C
100 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 32 25
181 3- 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G3 or J3 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
118 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
110 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 28 30
257 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G3 or J3 3/4 10.8/5.4 1.1 7.6 56C
110 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
115 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 28 28
240 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G3 or J3 3/4 10.8/5.4 1.1 7.6 56C
71 0- 25 1,3,V, D- 15 G or J 1/4 7.4/3.7 2.1/1.0 4.8 42C
120 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 34 22
150 3- 50 1,3,V, D- 15 G3 or J3 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
102 0- 33 1,3,V, D- 10 G or J 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 3.2 42C
125 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 30 28
224 3- 75 1,3,V, D- 10 G3 or J3 3/4 10.8/5.4 1.1 7.6 56C
128 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
150 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 22 34
253 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C
120 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
160 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 22 32
239 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C
106 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
180 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 25 32
210 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C
88 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
220 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 28 30
176 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C
83 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
230 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 28 28
164 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C
77 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
250 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 30 28
153 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C
64 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
300 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 32 25
128 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C
57 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
340 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 32 22
113 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C
53 0- 50 1,3,V, D- 05 G or J 1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0 5 56C
360 M2- C 1G or 3J 8M 34 22
106 3- 1H 1,3,V, D- 05 G3 or J3 1 2.8/1.4 3.4/1.7 10 56C

M2-C3J3-8M3225 (250 Mounting Pkg w/high capacity gearbox) 1H3-05J3 (230/460VAC 1HP Gearmotor@300 FPM)
Voltage Key
Notes:
1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved See Drive Accessories (pages 114-115)
2. Torque values are based upon running torque
e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs

Motor Controls
6.00
5.00
30:1 speed range
UL/ULc/CE
5.00
To Order:
Part Number:
UL/ULc/CE
2.84 4.45
IP 20 Enclosure
4.57 5.73 5.13 To Order:
Part Number:*
4X .18 DIA. .34
Standard AC Control

30:1 speed range
7.20
6.35 UL/ULc/CE

Part Number:
2.12
2.20 1.20

.19 UL/ULc
6.35
Run/Stop switch
5.16
To Order:
4.56
2.20 1.20

Motion Controls

5.13 5.75
UL/CSA/CE
IP55 Enclosure
To Order:

Turn to release
2.25 UL/CSA/CE
IP55 Rated

5.88 LOCK-OUT
TAG-OUT
To Order:

3.50
2X .22 DIA.
UL/CSA/CE
IP65 Enclosure
2.37 2.75
To Order:
3.76 Part Number:

Heavy Duty Motor Options

Part Number Description
125-0149-05 ON/OFF switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor
125-0149-06 FORWARD/REVERSE switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor
125-0149-07 8’ cord and plug for 1 PH heavy duty motor
125-0149-09 8’ cord and plug for 90VDC motor - see controller for details

125 Series Application Assistance Form
Please photocopy these pages to send to QC Industries QC Industries

4057 Clough Woods Dr.
Use these sheets in conjunction with the catalog pages to record the
Batavia, OH 45103
part numbers. This sheet can be used to document your application
513.753.6000 Fax 513.753.6001
and request a quotation.
2 1
Record your part numbers here:
5 1 Conveyor
3 2 Side/Guide Rails
4
6
3 Mounts
4 Stands/CrossTies
5 Gearmotor Mounting
7 6 Gearmotor
7 Controllers/Drives
Application Details Please use this space to denote some information about the application itself:
Part Description Part Dimensions: W L H
Load Information Concentrated Side Loading
Part Weight Uniformly Distributed Accumulating
Max Load Equivalent Load
Environment Information Chemical Consideration
Environment Description FDA Consideration
USDA Consideration
Static Electricity Consideration
Application Notes
Contact Information Area to sketch ideas/layouts
Company Contact
Address Phone
City, State, Zip Fax
1 Conveyor Details
Step 1
Choose from the options in the catalog (pages 11, 15, 19, 47, or 51). *Application hint: If
you have an FDA consideration, you will want to choose a corrosion resistant construction
1 2 3 4
with a stainless steel frame.
Step 2
Choose the width and length (in inches) you require. Please figure the equivalent load on Belt
the conveyor to ensure you have correctly sized a conveyor for the application. Tail
Record your equivalent load here. Drive Pulley
Drive Location
Step 3 Length (in inches)
Width (in inches)
Choose from the options in the catalog (pages 11, 15, 19, 47, or 51). *Application hint: Frame Style (H= Straight)
Gang driven applications require different drive pulleys. Reference page 41 for details. Frame Type (See page 11, 15, or 19)
Different tail pulleys are described on pages 42 and 43. Construction (S=Standard, R=Corrosion Resistant)
Drive Type (E=End Drive)
Step 4 Series (1=125)
Choose a belt from page 15, 20-21, 51, or 52-53.
Record your part number above.
2 Side/Guide Rails
Step 1
1 2 3
Choose from the options listed on pages 22-25 and 54-57. *Application hint: Adjustable
guide rails have an extra digit at the end of the part number (see page 23). 125
Step 2 Conveyor Length (in inches)
Choose the rail or guide identifier from pages 22-24 or 54-57.
Side/Guide Identifier
Step 3 Prefix
Enter the nominal length of the conveyor in these three positions.
Note: Some product containment/lane divider/hopper part numbers have slightly different
part number legends. Please refer to those pages for the correct part number.
Record your part number on previous page.

3 Conveyor Mounts
Step 1
Choose from the options listed on pages 26-27, and 58. *Application hint: Mounts are used 1 2 3
to attach conveyors to stands and other surfaces. Some mounts will not work with certain
belting or conveyor configurations. Check the Notes area to ensure compatibility. 125
Step 2 Mount Specific Suffix
Enter the two digit suffix for the mount you have chosen. This suffix could be a designator Mount Identifier
of how it is mounted or a conveyor width. Prefix
Step 3
Enter mount specific suffix.
4 Stands
Step 1
1 2 3
Choose from the options listed on pages 28, 29, and 59. *Application hint: Choose between
aluminum, powder coated steel, or stainless steel stands. Note that powder coated steel
stands extend wider than conveyor width.
Stand Width
Step 2 Upper height range
Choose the upper and lower stand height ranges. Reference pages 28-29 and 59. Lower height range
Stand Identifier
Step 3
Choose the stand width. Reference pages 28-29 and 59.
Note: QC recommends cross ties (see pages 28-29) for all applications. Additionally we
recommend that the stands be bolted to the floor.
Step 1 1 2 3 4
Enter M1 in the first two digits.
Step 2
Refer to page 31 and 61 for help in creating part number and sizing the drive. Then choose Sprocket/pulley combinations
top, bottom, side, or remote, and drive position. Belt/chain identifier
Gear reducer size & handing
Step 3 Motor mounting position & type
Series (1=125)
Refer to pages 33, 35, 37, 63, or 65 to choose reducer type and handing. Mounting (M=Mounting)
Step 4
If this is a top or bottom drive, choose belt or chain, then fill in the pulley/sprocket
combinations (page 33, 35, 37, 63, or 65)
6 Gearmotor
Step 1 1 2 3
Choose the horsepower based upon sizing instructions on page 31 or 61.
Step 2
Choose the voltage of the motor. Application hint: If choosing a heavy duty motor, choose a ‘V’ option to have a Gear reducer ratio
90VDC gearmotor with a controller. Choose a ‘D’ option for a 90VDC gearmotor and supply your own. All AC Voltage
controllers are sold separately. Horsepower
Step 3
Choose the gear reducer listed in the table that corresponds to your previous selections.
125 Z Series Application Assistance Form

Batavia, OH 45103
513.753.6000 Fax 513.753.6001
2
Record your part numbers here:
1
5 1 Conveyor
2 Guide Rails
3 3 Flared Rails / Hopper
6
4 Stands/CrossTies
4
7 6 Gearmotor
7 Controllers/Drives
Environment Information
Environment Description
Application Notes
Dimensions
Record all the known
dimensions of the
application in the
boxes to the right.
For a ‘U’ or ‘N’
application please
contact the factory.
Denote ‘Z’ Conveyor Application Here Denote ‘L’ Conveyor Application Here Denote ‘R’ Conveyor Application Here
Contact Information
Company Contact
Address Phone
1 Conveyor Details
Step 1
Choose from the options in the catalog (page 80). *Application hint: Please follow the
instructions on page 78 and build the application and part number from pages 78 through
81. 1 2 3 4 5
Step 2
Choose the width, length, and angle your application requires. *Application hint: Each
configuration (Z, L, or R) has different length sections. The angle is always denoted after Belt Cleats
the first frame section. Ex 024B036 Tail
Step 3 Drive Pulley
Drive Location
Choose from the options in the catalog (page 81). Length and angle
Width (in inches)
Step 4 Frame Style (Z,L, or R)
Choose a belt from page 81. *Application hint: Cleat width and useable belt width is Frame Type (See page 80)
determined by the rail systems chosen; a corrugated sidewall (rail built into the belt) or a Construction (S=Standard)
Drive Type (E=End Drive)
guide rail. Series (1=125)
Step 5
Determine the number of cleats along the belt (page 81)
2 Guide Rails
Note:
1 2 3
Fill in this part number only when using an adjustable guide rail (page 82) instead of a
corrugated sidewall belt. Otherwise, skip this step. *Application hint: Adjustable guide rails
Z 028
leave a clearance between the bottom of the rail and the belt. If carrying small parts
consider a corrugated sidewall belt. A Frame B Frame C Frame
Angle
Step 1 Side/Guide Identifier
Enter the series and guide rail designator as shown. Prefix
Step 2
Enter the angle (B,C,D,E, or F).
Step 3
Enter the frame section lengths (in inches) for sections a, b, and c (c option for Z configurations).
3 Flared Rails / Hopper

Step 1
1 2 3
Choose from the options listed on page 83. *Application hint: Combine the flared side rails
and end stops together for a hopper. See bottom of page 83. Z 1004
Step 2 0234
Choose a flared side rail (1004) and/or one or two end stops (0234). Rail Specific Suffix
Rail Identifier Stop Specific Suffix
End Stop Identifier
Step 3 Prefix
Enter the three digit length for the flared rail (make sure it is 6” smaller than the a section).
Enter the two digit width for the end stop.

4 Stands
Step 1
Enter the prefix number as shown. *Application hint: If you application requires an infeed height 1 2 3 4
of 9” or less choose from the stands on page 84, otherwise reference page 85) 223
Step 2 Stand Width
Choose a caster or foot type stand. Upper height range
Lower height range
Caster or Foot
Step 3 Stand Identifier
Choose the top of belt height range for your application. Use the information from pages 84 - 85
in choosing your stands. Reference pages 84 - 85 in choosing the standard height ranges.
Step 4
Choose the width of your conveyor. Note: low range stands do not require this designation. We
Step 1 1 2 3 4
Enter M1 in the first two digits.
Step 2
Refer to page 87 for help in creating part number and sizing the drive. Then choose top, Sprocket/pulley combinations
bottom, side, or remote, and drive position. Belt/chain identifier
Gear reducer size & handing
Step 3 Motor mounting position & type
Series (1=125)
Refer to page 89 to choose reducer type and hand. Mounting (M=Mounting)
Step 4
If this is a top or bottom drive, choose belt or chain, then fill in the pulley/sprocket
combinations (page 89).
6 Gearmotor
Step 1
1 2 3
Choose the horsepower based upon sizing instructions on page 87.
Step 2
Gear reducer ratio
Choose the voltage of the motor. Application hint: Choose a ‘V’ option to have a 90VDC gearmotor with a controller.
Choose a ‘D’ option for a 90VDC gearmotor and supply your own. All AC controllers are sold seperately. Voltage
Horsepower
Step 3
Choose the gear reducer listed in the table that corresponds to your previous selections.
250 Series Application Assistance Form

Batavia, OH 45103
513.753.6000 Fax 513.753.6001
2
1 Record your part numbers here:
1 Conveyor
2 Guide Rails
5
6
3 Mounts
3 4 Stands / Cross Ties
4
7 6 Gearmotor
7 Controllers / Drives
For surface mounting
Environment Information Chemical Consideration
Environment Description FDA Consideration
USDA Consideration
Static Electricity Consideration
Application Notes
Area to sketch ideas/layouts
Contact Information
Company Contact
Address Phone
1 Conveyor Details
Step 1
Choose from the options in the catalog (page 95 or 99). *Application hint: Center drives
offer longer conveyor lengths.
1 2 3 4
Step 2
Choose the width and length your application requires. *Application hint: Conveyor lengths
120” and uder are made from one frame. Those over 120” are made with multiple frames.
Belt
The center drive has a nominal 48” drive frame section while the end drive has a nominal Tail
36” drive frame section. Reference drawings on pages 92 and 96 for details Drive Pulley
Note: Center drive conveyors have the drive pulley located in the center of the conveyor Drive Location
Length (in inches)
length. For other drive locations options contact the factory. Width (in inches)
Frame Style (H= Horizontal)
Step 3 Frame Type (See page 95 or 99)
Choose from the options in the catalog (page 95 or 99). Construction (S=Standard)
Drive Type (E=End Drive or C= Center Drive)
Step 4 Series (2=250)
Choose a belt from pages 100-101. *Application hint: Some longer conveyor applications
may require the belt to be mechanically spliced. Consult the factory for details.
2 Side/Guide Rails
Step 1
1 2 3
Choose from the options listed on pages 102-104.
250
Step 2
Conveyor Length or frame
Choose the identifier from pages 102-103. length (in inches)
Side/Guide Identifier
Prefix
Step 3
Enter the nominal length of the conveyor or the frame section. *Application hint: The bolt
on extrusions are slightly shorter than the actual frame length.

3 Conveyor Mounts
Step 1
Choose from the options listed on page 105. *Application hint: Mounts for the 250 Series 1 2 3
are used for surface mounting only. They are not needed if using the stands listed on
pages 106-107. 125
Step 2 Mount Specific Suffix
Enter the two digit suffix for the mount you have chosen. This suffix could be a designator Mount Identifier
of how it is mounted or a conveyor width. Prefix
Step 3
Enter mount specific suffix
4 Stands
Step 1
1 2 3
Choose from the options listed on pages 106-107. *Application hint: Reference the
drawings on page 107 for typical stand layouts and part numbers. Certain stands require a 0182
two digit stand style to be added to the four digit prefix.
Stand Width
Step 2 Upper height range
Lower height range
Choose the upper and lower stand height ranges. Reference pages 28-29 and 59. Stand Style
Stand Identifier
Step 3
Choose the stand width. Reference page 107
Note: QC recommends cross ties (see page 106) for all applications. Additionally, we
Step 1
1 2 3 4
Enter M2 in the first two digits. *Application hint: There are two different capacity
gearboxes to choose from (standard or high) Refer to sizing instructions on page 108. M2 C 8M
Step 2
Refer to page 108-109 for help in creating part number and sizing the drive. Then choose Sprocket combinations
an end or center drive and which side of the conveyor the drive will be attached. Belt identifier
*Application hint: Both center and end drives use a ‘C’ designator. Gear reducer size & handing
Motor mounting position & type
Series (2=250)
Step 3 Mounting (M=Mounting)
Refer to pages 110 or 112 to choose reducer type and hand. If using a high capacity
gearbox you will enter a ‘3’ into the shaded box shown in the legend to the right.
Step 4
Choose the belt identifier and enter the sprocket ratios as listed on page 111 or 113.
6 Gearmotor
Step 1
Choose the horsepower based upon sizing instructions on page 108. Note that some applications require a high 1 2 3
capacity gearbox which will require a different horsepower motor be chosen
Step 2
Gear reducer ratio
Choose the voltage of the motor. Application hint: Choose a ‘V’ option to have a 90VDC gearmotor with a controller.
Choose a ‘D’ option for a 90VDC gearmotor and supply your own. All AC controllers are sold seperately (pg 114). Voltage
Horsepower
Step 3
Choose the gear reducer listed in the table that corresponds to your previous selections. If using a high capacity
gearbox you will enter a ‘3’ into the shaded box shown in the legend to the right.
Warranty & RGA
QC INDUSTRIES CONVEYOR WARRANTY
QC INDUSTRIES warrants that our conveyors are free from defects in materials and workmanship and fit for the ordinary purposes for which such goods are
used, under normal installation, use and service for one (1) year from date of purchase or 2100 hours of running use, whichever is sooner. QC INDUSTRIES will
replace any defective part within the warranty period, without charge, provided:
1. The Purchaser gives QC INDUSTRIES prompt written notice of the defect, including the date of purchase and original purchase order number.
2. The Purchaser will then be given a return goods authorization number (RGA #) which must be displayed on all labels and packing slips returned with
merchandise. (See RGA section)
3. The Purchaser pays for delivery of the defective part to QC Industries for inspection and verification of the defect.
4. The Purchaser shall pay all shipping and insurance charges for the replacement part from QC INDUSTRIES and the cost of installing the replacement part.
This warranty is limited to the replacement of defective parts. QC INDUSTRIES WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY ANY DEFECT IN THIS UNIT.
This warranty shall not apply if any failure of this unit or its parts is caused by unreasonable use, lack of maintenance, improper maintenance and/or repairs,
incorrect adjustments, exposure to corrosive or abrasive material, moisture causing damage, or any modification or alteration affecting the operation of the unit
which is not authorized by QC INDUSTRIES in writing. This warranty shall not apply to the following items that are covered by their manufacturer's warranty,
subject to any limitation contained in those warranties.
(A) Bearings (C) Reducers (E) Casters

(B) Motors (D) Controllers (F) Belts (unless otherwise agreed to in writing)
CAUTION: Any attempt to repair such items may actually void the manufacturer's warranty. Any description of this unit is only to identify it and it not a warranty
that the unit fits the description. Only an official of QC INDUSTRIES may make any warranties for QC INDUSTRIES. Any warranties implied by law are limited in
duration to the one (1) year term of this warranty. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH HEREIN, QC INDUSTRIES MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER
EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY FOR FITNESS OR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
LOST OR DAMAGED GOODS: PLEASE READ THESE IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS
Shipments should be inspected immediately upon receipt for lost or damaged goods. Any loss or damage should be noted on the carriers receipt (or bill of lading)
at the time of acceptance. If items are perceived to be lost or damaged after the shipment has been accepted, it becomes more difficult to file a claim with the
carrier if the receipt does not indicate such loss or damage. Do not, at any time, request the carrier to return any items or shipment to QC Industries without
previous authorization from our company for such a return. Please notify QC Industries as soon as any loss or damage is discovered and request the department
that handles the lost or damaged goods. You will need to know a complete description of all lost or damaged items. If replacement items are needed, a purchase
order made out to QC Industries will need to be supplied. QC Industries will then contact the carrier's local agent and request that an inspection of the items be
performed. This is absolutely necessary. Unless an inspection is performed, the carrier will not entertain any claim for loss or damage. After the inspection has
been completed, the carrier will notify QC Industries. If the carrier takes responsibility for the claim, a credit will be issued to you for the replacement item(s),
including freight charges from QC Industries, where applicable. If the carrier does not take responsibility for the claim, a representative of QC Industries will
contact you.
RETURNED GOODS AUTHORIZATION AND ORDER CANCELLATION REVISION POLICY
If, for any reason, an item needs to be returned to QC Industries or an in-house order needs to be cancelled or revised, the Purchaser is required to adhere to the
following series of steps to ensure that the return or cancellation is handled in the proper manner.
RGA POLICY/INSTRUCTIONS
1. Promptly call QC Industries at (513) 753-6000 and request the department that handles Returned Goods Authorization. At this time, you will be asked to
answer pertinent questions relating to the returned items. We ask that you have the following information ready:
• Name of distributor (if applicable) through which item(s) were purchased.
• Name of the Customer and/or end user of the item(s).
• Any/all purchase order numbers related to the item(s) in question.
• Phone number and names of contacts involved in the return (as it may become necessary that they be contacted later).
• Complete part numbers of all items involved in the return.
• Complete description as the reason for the return and the actions that need to be taken. (If the item is to be replaced, a new purchase order number
must be supplied by the Purchaser along with complete shipping and billing instructions. These replacements will be treated as separate orders by QC
Industries and evaluated for possible credit only after returned items are received and evaluated.)
2. After the call has been made to QC Industries, we will process your RGA and you will be faxed the RGA number to use for returning the item(s). RGA
numbers will not be given verbally over the phone.
3. Upon receipt of your RGA, you are required to return the item(s) within 30 days of receipt of said authorization. After 30 days, the Return Authorization will
be void if item(s) have not been received by QC Industries. All shipping charges and freight insurance charges of returned goods will the responsibility of the
Purchaser.
4. The RGA number must be clearly marked on the outside of all packages. It must also be on any paperwork, packing slips, or delivery receipts. If there is no
RGA number visible on the package, the package may be refused and sent back at the Purchaser's expense.
5. After receipt of returned goods, QC Industries will evaluate the item(s) for credit and take the appropriate action based on each situation. Standard items are
returned in new, resalable condition, will be credited for the amount of the purchase less 20%. Full credit will only be issued on items that are considered to
be defective at the time of shipment from QC Industries and are evaluated to be under warranty. Please allow 30 days for credits to be issued.
ORDER CANCELLATION/REVISION POLICY

If it becomes necessary to cancel or revise an order prior to the order being shipped, QC Industries reserves the right to evaluate each order that is to be
cancelled or revised and determine if any charges are applicable. A 20% Restocking Charge will apply if an order is assembled and ready to ship prior to its
cancellation or revision and the order is totally comprised of standard stock items. If the order contains other than stock items, an evaluation will be made based
on the status of the order. Additional charges will be included with the 20% Restocking Charge if any of the following conditions are met:
1. The order contains any items that are considered to be non-stock items and these items have already been produced by QC Industries or one of its
suppliers.
2. The order contains any items that require special handling or assembly and these processes have been completed.
3. The Customer has specified that they will pick up an order from QC's facility by a predetermined time and that time frame has expired. In this case, QC will
make an attempt to notify the Customer. If this cannot be accomplished in a reasonable time, the order will be disassembled and the Customer will be
charged a restocking fee and any additional charges based on the order's contents as explained herein.

QC Industries
LLC
nt
Conveyor Selection Guide
nda ame
Ang Resista
Fr
etic
rd
ard
orro d
led
on
e
Ser Magn
Ser Stand
t
i
a
s
This Guide is intended to provide
Cle
Sta
a general reference as to the most
250 eries
es C
common application use. For
ies
ies
ies
ies
assistance contact our application
Ser
Ser
ZS
i
Ser
specialists.
125
125
125
125
125
Accumulation • • •
Assembly • • • •
Automotive • • • • •
Bar Code Scanning • • •
Bulk Product • • •
Clean Room Operations • •
Cosmetics • • • • •
Curing • •
Diverting • •
Electronic Component Automation • •
Food Processing • •
High Temperature Applications • •
Incline/Decline Operations • • • •
Ink Jet Printing • •
Inspection • • •
Labeling • • •
Machine Integration • • • • • •
Material Handling • •
Medical • • •
Metal Stamping • • • •
Packaging • • • • •
Palletized Operations • •
Parts Separation • • • • •
Part and Scrap Removal • • • •
Pharmaceutical • • •
Plastics Molding • • •
Robotic Integration • •
Scanning • • •
Weighing • • •
Workcells • • • •

QC Industries 125, 125Z and 250 Series Catalog

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

QC Industries 125, 125Z and 250 Series Catalog

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

QC Industries LLC

Low profile conveyors

Driven by customers ... powered by proven products

125 Series Standard Conveyors Page

125 Series Cleated Conveyors Page

125 Series Magnetic Conveyors Page

Application Assistance Form 116-117

125 Z Series Angled Frame Conveyors Page

250 Series End & Center Drive Conveyors Page

Learn about QC Industries 4-7

We offer standard low QC Industries is a Lean

As standard, our conveyors Packaging

Great products are made With representative organizations

We have experienced Quality assurance and

24-Hour Quote Turnaround World Class Delivery

In today's fast paced Once you have sized your

We offer CAD disks to help A benchmark of the QC

Check Out Our Web Site A World-Class Company

Go online to We have built our reputation by

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

Tail Assembly Drive Assembly

Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance

**Verify Load Capacity:

5. Conveyor Friction 5. 150

Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-5) lbs. 0

125 Series Standard

Series Drive Type Construction Frame Frame Style

B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige)

Drive Location Drive Pulley Type Tail Pulley Type

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

Tail Assembly Drive Assembly

Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 14-B

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5

B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige) H = Straight Frame

Drive Location Drive Pulley Type Tail Pulley Type

Choose a base belt material and cleat height

Base Belt Material 5mm 19mm 1/2” 3/4” 1” w/corr. sides 1” 2” 3”

2.69 NO MAGNETS NO MAGNETS 4.00

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

Tail Assembly Drive Assembly

Technical Data Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 14-A

Equivalent Load Constant

4. Side Seals 4. 3.0

please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory.

Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-5) lbs. 96

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5

Series Drive Type Construction Frame Frame Style

1 = 125 E = End Drive M = Magnetic E = 1.81” Stainless Steel H = Straight Frame

Drive Location Drive Pulley Type Tail Pulley Type

Choose three-digit belt ordering code on page 20 and 21.

Step 5 As standard, we assemble the

Note: proceed to page 22 to

Color Contrasting Belts

20 QC Industries 513.753.6000 Specifications subject to change - consult factory

Accumulation Belts (Low Friction)

Static Conductive Belts

Color Contrasting Belts

Release Properties Belts

Chemical Resistant Belts

Fixed Side Rails

2.22 2.22 2.35

W + 1.19 W + 1.19 W + 1.19

1.93 * 1.78 1.93 * 1.78 2.05 * 1.90

2.03 2.03 2.03

Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM See Drive Location Chart